96 mystique

284

Upload: rukford

Post on 20-Aug-2015

221 views

Category:

Documents


4 download

TRANSCRIPT

[PI00070( Z)03/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:0001462-C

File:cdpiz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:10:02 1996

*[PI00100(ALL)05/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:0040299-A

File:cdpiz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:10:02 1996

*[PI00560(ALL)05/95]

Table of Contents

Introductory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Safety Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Starting Your Mystique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Warning Lights and Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Instrument Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Electronic Sound Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Driving Your Mystique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Roadside Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Servicing Your Mystique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Quick Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Service Station Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

File:cdpiz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:10:02 1996

1

Introductory Information

*[IN00300(ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You

*[IN00400(ALL)04/95] At Ford Motor Company, excellence is the continuouscommitment to achieve the best result possible. It is dedicationto learning what you want, determination to develop the rightconcept, and execution of that concept with care, precision, andattention to detail. In short, excellence means being the standardby which others are judged.

*[IN00500(ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles

*[IN00600(ALL)04/95] ■ Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the quality of ourproducts and services must be our number one priority.

*[IN00700(ALL)04/95] ■ You are the focus of everything we do. Our work must bedone with you in mind, providing better products andservices than our competition.

*[IN00750(ALL)04/95] ■ Continuous improvement is essential to our success. Wemust strive for excellence in everything we do: in ourproducts — in their safety and value — and in our services,our human relations, our competitiveness, and ourprofitability.

*[IN00800(ALL)04/95] ■ Employee involvement is our way of life. We are a team.We must treat one another with trust and respect.

*[IN00900(ALL)04/95] ■ Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We must maintainmutually beneficial relationships with dealers, suppliers, andour other business associates.

*[IN01000(ALL)04/95] ■ Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct worldwidemust be pursued in a manner that is socially responsible andcommands respect for its integrity and for its positivecontributions to society.

File:cdinz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:48 1996

2

*[IN01100(ALL)05/95] Things to Know About Using This Guide

*[IN01200(ALL)05/95] Congratulations on the purchase of your new vehicle. Thisguide has information about the equipment and the options foryour new vehicle. You may not have bought all of the optionsavailable to you. If you do not know which information appliesto your vehicle, talk to your dealer.

*[IN01300(ALL)05/95] This guide describes equipment and gives specifications forequipment that was in effect when this guide was approved forprinting. Ford may discontinue models or change specificationsor design without any notice and without incurring obligation.

[IN01350(ALL)05/95] As you read through your owner guide, carefully read allWarnings because they tell you how toavoid endangeringyourself, your passengers, and other people.

*[IN01400(ALL)05/95] NOTES and WARNINGS

*[IN01420(ALL)05/95] NOTES give you additional information about the subjectmatter you are referencing.

*[IN01440(ALL)05/95] WARNINGS remind you to be especially careful in those areaswhere carelessness can cause damage to your vehicle orpersonal injury to yourself, your passengers or other people.Please read all WARNINGS carefully.

*[IN01460(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

*[IN01500(ALL)05/95] Finding Information in This Guide

*[IN01600(ALL)04/95] After you have read this guide once, you will probably returnto it when you have a specific question or need additionalinformation. To help you find specific information quickly, youcan use the Quick Index or the Index.

File:cdinz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:48 1996

Introductory Information

3

*[IN01700(ALL)05/95] The Quick Index at the end of the book provides a pagenumber following each item which indicates where detailedinformation can be found.

*[IN01900(ALL)04/95] To use the Index, turn to the back of the book and search in thealphabetical listing for the word that best describes theinformation you need. If the word you chose is not listed, thinkof other related words and look them up. We have designed theIndex so that you can find information under a technical term.

%*[IN02000(ALL)05/95] Canadian Owners — French Version

*[IN02100(ALL)05/95] French Owner Guides can be obtained from your dealer or bywriting to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, ServicePublications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, OntarioL4Y 4G3.

*[IN02400(ALL)04/95] Your Maintenance Schedule and RecordBooklet

*[IN02500(ALL)03/95] The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet lists the servicesthat are most important for keeping your vehicle in goodcondition. A record log is also provided to help you keep trackof all services performed.

*[IN02600(ALL)01/95] About the Warranties

*[IN02700(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is covered by three types of warranties: BasicVehicle Warranty, Extended Warranties on certain parts, andEmissions Warranties.

%*[IN03100(ALL)03/95] Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefully to find outabout your vehicle’s warranties and your basic rights andresponsibilities.

*[IN03300(ALL)03/95] If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, you can get a newone free of charge. Contact any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer,or refer to the addresses and phone numbers on the first pageof this owner guide.

File:cdinz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:48 1996

4

%*[IN04000(ALL)01/95] Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan

*[IN04100(ALL)01/94] If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you can buy a FordExtended Service Plan for your vehicle. This optional contractprovides service protection for a longer period of time than thebasic warranty that comes with your vehicle.

*[IN04200(ALL)01/95] You do not have to buy this option when you buy your vehicle.However, your option to purchase the Ford Extended ServicePlan runs out after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See your dealerfor more details about the Ford Extended Service Plan.

*[IN04250(ALL)01/95] If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did not takeadvantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time ofpurchase, you may still be eligible. See your dealer for thedetails.

*[IN06000(ALL)01/95] Breaking Your Vehicle In

*[IN06100(ALL)03/95] Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment or break-inperiod during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) that you drive it.During the break-in period, you need to pay careful attention tohow you drive your vehicle.

%*[IN06300(ALL)01/95] ■ Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehicle has new brakelinings, you should take these steps:

*[IN06400(ALL)01/95] — Watch traffic carefully so that you can anticipate when tostop.

*[IN06500(ALL)01/95] — Begin braking well in advance.

*[IN06600(ALL)01/95] — Apply the brakes gradually.

*[IN06700(ALL)01/95] The break-in period for new brake linings lasts for 100 miles(160 km) of city driving or 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ofhighway driving.

%*[IN06800(ALL)01/95] ■ Use only the type of engine oil that Ford recommends. SeeEngine oil recommendations in the Index. Do not use special“break-in” oils.

File:cdinz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:48 1996

Introductory Information

5

%*[IN06900(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle

*[IN06920(ALL)05/95] Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage the paint,especially in hot weather. Wash your vehicle as often asnecessary to keep it clean.

*[IN06940(ALL)05/95] Take similar precautions if your vehicle is exposed to chemicalindustrial fallout.

*[IN06960(ALL)06/95] Paint damage resulting from fallout is not related to a defect inpaint materials or workmanship and therefore is not covered bywarranty. Ford, however, believes that continual improvementin customer satisfaction is a high priority. For this reason, Fordhas authorized its dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner,the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by environmental falloutwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) of purchase,whichever comes first. Customers may be required to bring theirvehicle in for inspection by a Ford representative.

%*[IN07001(ALL)04/95] Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle

*[IN07101(ALL)04/95] Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the underside, witha mild detergent.

*[IN07201(ALL)04/95] DO NOT:

*[IN07301(ALL)04/95] ■ Wash your vehicle with hot water

*[IN07401(ALL)04/95] ■ Wash your vehicle while it sits in direct sunlight

*[IN07501(ALL)04/95] ■ Wash your vehicle while the body is hot

*[IN07901(ALL)04/95] Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits and protect thefinish.

File:cdinz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:48 1996

6

*[IN08101(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts

*[IN08201(ALL)04/95] Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild detergent. Donot use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, fuel or strong detergents.

%*[IN08301(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Plastic Parts

*[IN08401(ALL)04/95] Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are plastic. Clean witha tar and road oil remover if necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner forroutine cleaning.

*[IN08501(ALL)04/95] Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents orpetroleum-based cleaners.

%*[IN08701(ALL)04/95] If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove oversprayedrustproofing with a tar and road oil remover. If rustproofing isnot removed from plastic and rubber parts, it can causedeterioration.

File:cdinz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:48 1996

7

Safety Restraints

*[SR00500(ALL)04/95] Important Safety Belt Information

*[SR00600(ALL)03/95] The use of safety belts helps to restrain you and yourpassengers in case of a collision. In most states and in Canadathe law requires their use.

*[SR00700(ALL)01/95] Safety belts provide best restraint when:

*[SR00800(ALL)01/95] ■ the seatback is upright

*[SR00900(ALL)01/95] ■ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched)

*[SR01000(ALL)01/95] ■ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips

*[SR01100(ALL)01/95] ■ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest

*[SR01200(ALL)01/95] ■ the knees are straight forward

*[SR02250(ALL)05/95] To help you remember to fasten your safety belt, a warninglight may come on and a chime may sound. See Safety BeltWarning Light and Chime in the Warning Lights and Gaugeschapter.

*[SR02300(ALL)01/95] See the following sections in this chapter for directions on howto properly use these safety belts. Also see Safety Restraints forChildren in this chapter for special instructions about usingsafety belts for children.

%*[SR02400(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Make sure that you and your passengers wear safetybelts. Always drive and ride with your seatback uprightand the lap belt snug and low across the hips.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

8

*[SR02700(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Neverswing it around the neck over the inside shoulder. Neveruse a single belt for more than one person or across morethan one seating position. Each seating position in yourvehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is madeup of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to beused as a pair. Failure to follow these precautions couldincrease the risk and/or severity of injury in a collision.

*[SR02850(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Ford recommends that all safety belt assemblies andattaching hardware should be inspected by a qualifiedtechnician after any collision. Safety belt assemblies notin use during a collision should also be inspected andreplaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

*[SR02900(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision,children should always ride with the seatback upright.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

9

*[SR03000(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lapwhile the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannotprotect the child from injury in a collision.

*[SR03200(ALL)05/95] Lock the doors of your vehicle before driving to lessen the riskof the door coming open in a collision.

*[SR03600(ALL)05/95] Combination Lap and Shoulder Belts

*[SR03900(ALL)05/95] While your vehicle is in motion, the combination lap andshoulder belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brakehard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, the lap and shoulder belt locks and helpsreduce your forward movement.

*[SR04000(ALL)05/95] After you get into your vehicle, close the door and lock it. Thenadjust the seat to the position that suits you best.

*[SR04100(ALL)05/95] Pull the combination lap/shoulder belt from the retractor sothat the shoulder portion of the belt crosses your shoulder andchest. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If it is, remove the twist.Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear asnap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastenedto the buckle by pulling on tongue.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

10

[SR04300(ALL)02/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001196-AFastening the front seat lap and shoulder belt

*[SR04450(ALL)05/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understand Important Safety BeltInformation at the beginning of this chapter.

%*[SR04700(ALL)05/95] To adjust the lap part of the belt, pull up on the shoulder beltuntil the lap belt fits snugly and as low as possible around yourhips.

[SR05100(ALL)01/95]

10-1/2 pica art:0000684-E

Unfastening the combination lap and shoulder belts

*[SR05400(ALL)05/95] While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to its original positionto prevent it from striking you or the vehicle.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

11

% [SR05625(ALL)03/95] Dual Locking Mode Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor[SR05650(ALL)12/94] The front passenger seat and the rear outer seat combination lap

and shoulder belts are equipped with a dual locking moderetractor on the shoulder belt portion of the lap/shoulder belt.This retractor can be switched from vehicle sensitive(emergency) locking mode to automatic locking mode by pullingthe belt webbing all of the way out of the retractor. Theretractor modes function as follows.

*[SR05675(ALL)02/95] Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode

[SR05700(ALL)05/94] In this operating mode, the lap/shoulder belt retractor willallow the occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only onhard braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately5 mph (8 km/h) or more.

*[SR05725(ALL)01/95] Automatic locking mode

*[SR05800(ALL)03/95] This mode must be used when installing a child seat on thefront passenger seat and rear seats where dual locking retractorsare provided. To switch the retractor from the emergencylocking mode to the automatic locking mode, perform thefollowing steps:

*[SR05850(ALL)03/95] RWARNING

Rear facing infant seats should never be placed in thefront seat.

*[SR05900(ALL)03/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.

*[SR05950(ALL)01/95] 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downwarduntil all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard. At thistime, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (childrestraint mode).

[SR06000(ALL)03/95] 3. Allow the belt to retract. A clicking sound will be heard asthe belt retracts. This indicates that the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode.

[SR06025(ALL)03/95] 4. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove slack in the lap belt.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

12

*[SR06050(ALL)05/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckledand allowed to retract completely, the retractor willswitch to the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lockingmode. See the detailed instructions under Safety Seatsfor Children in this chapter.

*[SR06051(ALL)05/95] Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment

*[SR06052(ALL)05/95] Driver and right front passenger

[SR06053(ALL)03/95] You can adjust the shoulder belt height to one of four (4)positions.

*[SR06054(ALL)03/95] To adjust the belt down, push the release button (see figures 1and 2). To adjust the belt up, slide the adjuster up. (You do nothave to push the release button.)

[SR06056(ALL)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0001183-CFigure 1 — The shoulder belt height adjuster

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

13

[SR06057(ALL)05/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001184-DFigure 2 — Adjusting the shoulder belt height

[SR06070(ALL)05/95] Make sure the adjuster is firmly in one of the four positions.The belt should be adjusted up or down until the belt rests onyour shoulder near your neck.

*[SR06075(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Position the shoulder belt height adjuster so that the beltrests across the middle of your shoulder. Be sure theshoulder belt is properly positioned on your shouldereach time you use the belt. If the shoulder belt is offyour shoulder, on your upper arm or neck, there is agreater risk of severe injury in a collision.

*[SR06100(ALL)05/95] Lap Belts

*[SR06200(ALL)05/95] The lap belt in the center of the rear seat does not adjustautomatically. You must adjust it to fit snugly and as low aspossible around your hips. Do not wear it around your waist.

*[SR06300(ALL)05/95] Pull the belt across your hips and insert the tongue into thecorrect buckle on your seat until you hear a snap and feel itlock. Make sure the buckle is securely fastened.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

14

%*[SR06600(ALL)05/95] If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it and tip the belttongue at a right angle to the belt. Pull the belt tongue overyour lap until it reaches the buckle.

*[SR07000(ALL)05/95] If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the loose end of thewebbing until the belt fits snugly.

*[SR07100(ALL)02/95] To unfasten the belt, push the release button on the end of thebuckle. This allows the tongue to unlatch from the buckle.

[SR07150(ALL)05/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0000008-DUnfastening the lap belt in center rear seating position

%*[SR07300(ALL)05/95] Safety Belt Extension Assembly

*[SR07500(ALL)05/95] For some people, the safety belt may be too short even when itis fully extended. You can add about eight inches (20 cm) to thebelt length with a safety belt extension assembly (part number611C22). Safety belt extensions are available at no cost fromyour dealer.

*[SR07525(ALL)05/95] Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as thesafety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end ofthe webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extensiononly if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended.Do not use extension to change the fit of the shoulder beltacross the torso.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

15

*[SR07550(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Failure to follow these instructions will affect theperformance of the safety belts and increase the risk ofpersonal injury.

*[SR07600(ALL)05/95] Safety Belt Maintenance

*[SR07650(ALL)05/95] Check the safety belt systems periodically to make sure thatthey work properly and are not damaged.

%*[SR07700(ALL)05/95] Ford recommends that all safety belt assemblies and attachinghardware, should be inspected after any collision. Fordrecommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehiclesinvolved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision wasminor and a qualified technician finds that the belts do notshow damage and continue to operate properly, they do notneed to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during acollision should also be inspected and replaced if either damageor improper operation is noted.

[SR07725(ALL)05/95] Safety Belt Warning Label

[SR07750(ALL)05/95] A warning label has been placed on the buckle of each of yourvehicle’s front seat safety belts.

[SR07760(ALL)05/95] In a collision of sufficient severity while the safety belt is in use,the safety belt buckle will pull out of the sleeve so that all orpart of the orange portion of the label is visible.

[SR07775(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Whenever the orange portion of the label is visible, thesafety belt must be replaced.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

16

[SR07800(ALL)03/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0001322-AThe warning label on the front seat safety belt buckle

%*[SR07850(ALL)05/95] Cleaning the Safety Belts

*[SR07900(ALL)05/95] Clean the safety belts with any mild soap solution that isrecommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Do not bleachor dye the belt webbing because this may weaken it.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

17

*[SR14300(ALL)04/95] Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System(SRS)

*[SR14650(ALL)05/95] The driver and right front passenger air bags are SupplementalRestraint Systems (SRS), provided at these seating positions inaddition to the lap/shoulder belt, and are designed tosupplement the protection provided to properly beltedoccupants in moderate to severe frontal collisions. Thesupplemental air bag system does not provide restraint to thelower body.

*[SR14800(ALL)05/95] The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts

*[SR14950(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, shouldalways wear their safety belts, even when an air bagSupplemental Restraint System is provided.

*[SR15000(ALL)01/95] There are four very important reasons to use safety belts evenwith an air bag system. Use your safety belts to:

*[SR15100(ALL)01/95] ■ help keep you in the proper position (away from the air bag)when it inflates

*[SR15200(ALL)01/95] ■ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side or rear impactcollisions, because an air bag is not designed to inflate insuch situations

*[SR15300(ALL)01/95] ■ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisions that are notsevere enough to activate the supplemental air bag

*[SR15400(ALL)01/95] ■ reduce the risk of being thrown from your vehicle

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

18

%*[SR15500(ALL)01/95] The Importance of Being Properly Seated

*[SR15550(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If a passenger is not properly seated and restrained, aninflating air bag could cause serious injury.

*[SR15600(ALL)05/95] In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremely fast to helpprovide additional protection for you. In order to do this, theair bag must inflate with considerable force. If you are notseated in a normal riding position with your back against theseatback, the air bag may not protect you properly and couldpossibly hurt you as it inflates.

*[SR16050(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Rear-facing infant seats should never be placed in thefront seat.

*[SR16100(ALL)06/95] In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head is closer to the airbag. The force of the rapidly inflating air bag could push thetop of the rear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback or centerarmrests (if so equipped), or center console (if so equipped).REAR-FACING INFANT CARRIERS MUST ALWAYS BESECURED IN THE REAR SEAT, and other child safety seatsand infant seats should be secured in the rear seat wheneverpossible.

*[SR16250(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

When using forward-facing child seats move thepassenger seat as far back from the instrument panel aspossible. NEVER SECURE REAR-FACING INFANTSEATS IN THE FRONT SEAT.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

19

*[SR16275(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger air bag.Air bags deploy with great force, faster than the blink of an eye.Front passengers, especially children and small adults, mustnever sit on the front edge of the seat, stand near the glovecompartment of the instrument panel, or lean over near the airbag cover when the vehicle is moving. All occupants should sitwith their backs against the seatback, move the seat to the mostrearward position if possible and use the safety belts. Childrenweighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always should use child orinfant seats.

*[SR16300(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near theair bag cover on the steering wheel or in front seat areasthat may come in contact with a deploying air bag.Failure to follow this instruction may increase the risk ofpersonal injury in the event of a collision.

*[SR16325(ALL)05/95] For further information about the proper mounting ofequipment in the front seat of this vehicle, please refer to Ford’sbrochure entitled Some Important Information About Air BagSupplemental Restraint System which can be obtained by callingHelm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356. Ask for brochure FPS-8602.

*[SR16400(ALL)05/95] For additional important safety information on the proper use ofseat belts, child seats, and infant seats, please read the othersections of this part of the Owner Guide, especially sectionsentitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seats for Children.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

20

*[SR16500(ALL)01/95] How the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint SystemOperates

*[SR16750(ALL)05/95] The driver air bag is in the center of the steering wheel. Thefront passenger seat air bag is located in the center of theinstrument panel ledge above the glove compartment. Both airbags are designed to stay out of sight until they are activated.

[SR16790(ALL)05/95]

13-1/2 pica

art:0001475-A The location of air bags and warning labels

*[SR17400(ALL)05/95] If a collision occurs, the sensors sense the severity of the impactand activate the air bags if necessary. The air bag system isdesigned to deploy in frontal and front-angled collisions moresevere than hitting a parked vehicle (of similar size and weight)head-on at about 28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system sensesthe crash severity rather than vehicle speed, some frontalcollisions at speeds above 28 mph (45 km/h) will not inflate theair bag.

*[SR17500(ALL)05/95] When the sensors activate the system, the air bags inflaterapidly, filling with non-toxic nitrogen gas in a fraction of asecond. Immediately after inflation, the air bags deflate byreleasing the nitrogen gas through vent holes. The wholeprocess takes place in a matter of seconds.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

21

*[SR17580(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Air bag system components get hot after inflation. Donot touch them after inflation.

[SR17720(ALL)02/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0001205-AInflated driver-side air bag

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

22

[SR17740(ALL)02/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0001206-AInflated passenger-side air bag

*[SR18400(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAG WILL NOTFUNCTION AGAIN AND MUST BE REPLACEDIMMEDIATELY. If the air bag is not replaced, theunrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in acollision.

*[SR18425(ALL)05/95] To ensure that the air bag system will operate as intended in acrash, the system is equipped with a diagnostic module, whichcontrols a readiness lamp and a warning tone. The diagnosticmodule monitors its own circuits, the air bag electrical system,the air bag readiness light, the air bag power, and the air baginflators.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

23

%*[SR18450(ALL)05/95] The air bag system uses a readiness light on the instrumentcluster and a tone to indicate the condition of the system. Whenyou turn the ignition key to the ON position, this light willilluminate for approximately six (6) seconds and then turn off.This indicates that the system is operating normally. NOTE:Maintenance of the air bag system is not required.

%*[SR18475(ALL)05/95] A problem with the system is indicated by one or more of thefollowing:

*[SR18501(ALL)05/95] ■ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit,

*[SR18525(ALL)05/95] ■ or it will not light immediately after ignition is turned on,

*[SR18550(ALL)05/95] ■ or a group of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern willrepeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired.

*[SR18575(ALL)05/95] If any of these things happen, have the air bag system servicedat your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. Unlessserviced, the air bag supplemental restraint system may notfunction properly in the event of a collision.

*[SR18601(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air BagSupplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See yourFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

%*[SR19000(ALL)05/95] Disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles

*[SR19500(ALL)05/95] For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see yourlocal Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Air bags MUST bedisposed of by qualified personnel.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

24

*[SR20200(ALL)05/95] Safety Restraints for Children

*[SR20300(ALL)02/95] In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by law to use safetyrestraints for children. If small children ride in your vehicle —this generally includes children who are four years old oryounger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or less — you mustput them in safety seats that are made specially for children.Safety belts alone do not provide maximum protection for thesechildren. Check your local and state laws for specificrequirements.

*[SR20400(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lapwhile the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannotprotect the child from injury in a collision.

*[SR20600(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Passengers should not be allowed to ride in the cargoarea. Persons not riding in a seat with a fastened seatbelt are much more likely to suffer serious injury in acollision. Cargo should always be secured to prevent itfrom shifting and causing damage to the vehicle or harmto passengers.

*[SR20650(ALL)05/95] When possible, put children in the rear seat of your vehicle.Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seatingpositions.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

25

*[SR20700(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructionsincluded with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. Ifyou do not install and use the safety seat properly, thechild may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.

*[SR20750(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle thathas been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn asmall child. Check seat covers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.

*[SR20800(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never leave a child unattended in your vehicle.

%*[SR22000(ALL)01/95] Safety Seats for Children

*[SR22100(ALL)05/95] Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weightof the child. Always follow the safety seat manufacturer’sinstructions when installing and using the safety seat.

*[SR22125(ALL)02/95] Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a toptether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating positionwhich is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For moreinformation on top tether straps see Attaching Safety Seats WithTether Straps in this chapter.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

26

*[SR22300(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger air bag.Air bags deploy with great force, faster than the blink of an eye.Front passengers, especially children and small adults, mustnever sit on the front edge of the seat, stand near the glovecompartment of the instrument panel, or lean over near the airbag cover when the vehicle is moving. All occupants should sitwith their backs against the seatback, move the seat to the mostrearward position if possible and use the safety belts. Childrenweighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always should use child orinfant seats.

*[SR22400(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

When using forward-facing child seats move thepassenger seat as far back from the instrument panel aspossible. NEVER SECURE REAR-FACING INFANTSEATS IN THE FRONT SEAT.

[SR22450(ALL)05/95] THE FORCE OF THE RAPIDLY INFLATING PASSENGER AIRBAG COULD PUSH THE TOP OF THE REAR-FACING SEATAGAINST THE VEHICLE SEATBACK, ARMRESTS ORCONSOLE. REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYSBE SECURED IN THE REAR SEAT. Failure to follow theseinstructions could result in serious injury.

*[SR22475(ALL)05/95] All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or by the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

27

*[SR22500(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If you do not properly secure the safety seat, the childoccupying the seat may be injured during a collision orsudden stop. An unsecured safety seat could also injureother passengers.

*[SR22600(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructionsincluded with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. Ifyou do not install and use the safety seat properly, thechild may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.

*[SR22625(ALL)05/95] When installing a child safety seat, be sure to use the correctsafety belt buckle for that seating position, and make sure thetongue is securely fastened in the buckle.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

28

*[SR22650(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Always keep the buckle release button pointing upwardand away from the child seat, with the tongue betweenthe child seat and the release button as shown in thefollowing illustration.

[SR22700(ALL)03/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0001209-BSafety belt buckle placement for child seats

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

29

%*[SR22750(ALL)11/94] Installing Child Safety Seats in the Front PassengerSeat and Outer Rear Seating Positions

[SR22800(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor onthe shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safetybelt for the right front seat passenger and rear outer passengers.

*[SR22850(ALL)03/95] If you choose to install a child safety seat in the front seatingposition, move vehicle seat as far back as possible.

*[SR22900(ALL)03/95] 1. Position the child seat in center of passenger seat.

*[SR22950(ALL)03/95] 2. Pull down on shoulder belt, then grasp shoulder belt and lapbelt together. Figure 1.

[SR23000(ALL)02/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0001270-A

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

30

*[SR23050(ALL)05/95] 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together,route the tongue through the child seat according to thechild seat manufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Be surethat the belt webbing is not twisted.

[SR23100(ALL)02/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0001271-A

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

31

[SR23150(ALL)02/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0001272-A

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

32

[SR23200(ALL)01/95] 4. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downwarduntil all of the belt is extracted from the reel and a click isheard. At this time the retractor is in the automatic lockingmode (child restraint mode). Figure 4.

[SR23250(ALL)04/94]

24 pica art:0001273-A

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

33

[SR23300(ALL)03/95] 5. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder webbing. Aclicking sound will be heard as the belt retracts. Thisindicates the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Pushdown on the child seat while you pull up on the belt toremove any slack in the belt. Figures 5 and 6.

[SR23350(ALL)05/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0001274-B

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

34

[SR23400(ALL)02/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0001275-A

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

35

*[SR23450(ALL)03/95] 6. Before placing the child in the child seat, forcibly tilt the seatfrom side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that theseat is securely held in place, Figure 7.

[SR23500(ALL)05/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0001276-B

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

36

*[SR23550(ALL)11/94] 7. Double check that the retractor is in the automatic lockingmode. Try to pull more belt out of the retractor. If youcannot, the belt is in the automatic locking mode, Figure 8.

[SR23600(ALL)05/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0001277-B

[SR23650(ALL)02/94] 8. Check to make sure that the child seat is properly securedprior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 4through 7.

[SR23700(ALL)02/94] To remove retractor from automatic lock mode, unbuckle thebelt and allow the webbing to retract fully. A click will beheard as the belt retracts. The belt is back in normal operatingmode (vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode) when thisclick disappears.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

37

*[SR23800(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructionsincluded with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. Ifyou do not install and use the safety seat properly, thechild may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.

[SR23900(ALL)05/95] Installing Child Safety Seats in the Rear Center SeatingPosition

[SR24000(ALL)05/95] Some child safety seats are too wide to fit in the rear centerseat. Choose a child safety seat with a narrow base that can fitbetween the safety belt buckles.

*[SR24800(ALL)05/95] Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps

*[SR24850(ALL)05/95] Some manufacturers make safety seats that include a tetherstrap that goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches toan anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strapas an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of your child safetyseat for information about ordering a tether strap.

[SR24901(ALL)05/95] To install a tether from a child safety seat in the front seat,route the tether strap under the vehicle seat head restraint andhook the tether hook into the hole in the tongue of the centerrear lap belt. After the hook is in the hole, pull on the loose endof the lap belt webbing to shorten the belt and tighten thetether strap.

[SR25650(ALL)05/95] To install a tethered child safety seat in the rear seat, you willneed tether anchorage hardware.

[SR25700(ALL)05/95] Tether anchorage hardware (Canadian vehicles only)

[SR25800(ALL)05/95] All vehicles built for sale in Canada include a tether anchorhardware kit for use with child safety seats. Attachment holes(at each rear seating position) have been provided in yourvehicle to attach the anchor hardware, if required. Additionalkits can be obtained at no charge from any Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

38

[SR25900(ALL)03/95] Tether anchorage hardware (USA vehicles only)

[SR26000(ALL)05/95] All vehicles built for sale in the USA do not include a tetheranchor hardware kit for use with child safety seats. However,attachment holes (at each rear seating position) have beenprovided in your vehicle to attach the tether anchor hardware.If tether anchorage hardware is required for the child safetyseat, use only the tether anchor kit available at no charge fromany Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer (Base part number 613D74).

%*[SR27700(ALL)05/95] Safety Belts for Children

*[SR27800(ALL)05/95] Children who are too large for child safety seats should alwayswear safety belts. (See instructions with your child seat, orcontact its manufacturer, to determine maximum size of childthat will safely fit in the seat.)

*[SR27900(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

If safety belts are not properly worn and adjusted asdescribed, the risk of serious injury to the child in acollision will be much greater.

*[SR28000(ALL)05/95] If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap and shoulder beltscan be positioned so that it does not cross or rest in front of thechild’s face or neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulderbelt. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle mayhelp provide a good shoulder belt fit.

*[SR28100(ALL)05/95] To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts on children whohave outgrown child safety seats, Ford recommends use of abelt-positioning booster seat that is labelled as conforming to allFederal motor vehicle safety standards. Belt-positioning boosterseats raise the child and provide a shorter, firmer seatingcushion that encourages safer seating posture and better fit oflap and shoulder belts on the child. A belt-positioning booster

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

Safety Restraints

39

should be used if the shoulder belt rests in front of the child’sface or neck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly on boththighs, or if the thighs are too short to let the child sit all theway back on the seat cushion when the lower legs hang overthe edge of the seat cushion. You may wish to discuss thespecific needs of your child with your pediatrician.

*[SR28150(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

Do not use a belt-positioning booster with a lap-onlybelt.

*[SR28200(ALL)05/95] Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap and shoulder beltsshould always be worn snugly and below the hips, touching thechild’s thighs.

*[SR28300(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision,children should always ride with the seatback upright.

File:cdsrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:09:40 1996

41

Starting Your Mystique

*[ST03300(ALL)03/95] Ignition

*[ST03400(ALL)01/95] Understanding the Positions of the Ignition

[ST03725(ALL)02/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001185-DThe positions of the key in the ignition

[ST04100(ALL)02/95] LOCK and ACCESSORY lock the gearshift for all vehicles withan automatic transaxle.

*[ST04150(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

LOCK position does not lock the gearshift onfloor-mounted manual transaxle gearshifts. If the parkingbrake is not set and the gearshift is moved out of gear,your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone.

*[ST04180(ALL)06/95] The automatic transaxle gearshift must be in P (Park) to movethe key to the LOCK position.

*[ST04200(ALL)01/95] LOCK is the only position that allows you to remove the key.The LOCK feature helps to protect your vehicle from theft.

*[ST04300(ALL)05/95] If your key is stuck in the LOCK position and will not turn,move your steering wheel left or right until the key turns freely.

File:cdstz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:15 1996

42

[ST04400(ALL)05/94] ACCESSORY allows some of your vehicle’s electrical accessoriesto operate while the engine is not running. For example, youcan use ACCESSORY to turn on the radio without starting theengine.

*[ST04425(ALL)05/95] ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warning lights (except thebrake system warning light) to make sure they work before youstart the engine. The key returns to the ON position once theengine is started and remains in this position while the engineruns.

*[ST04450(ALL)03/95] START cranks the engine. Release the key once the engine startsso that you do not damage the starter. The key should return toON when you release it. The START position also allows you totest the brake warning light.

%*[ST04500(ALL)02/95] Removing the Key From the Ignition

*[ST04600(ALL)05/94] Procedures for removing your key from the ignition vary,depending on whether your vehicle has an automatic or manualtransaxle.

*[ST04700(ALL)04/94] If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle:

*[ST04800(ALL)06/92] 1. Put the gearshift lever in P (Park).

*[ST04900(ALL)01/95] 2. Set the parking brake fully.

[ST05000(ALL)05/94] 3. Rotate the ignition key to the LOCK position.

[ST05100(ALL)02/95] 4. Remove the key from the ignition.

*[ST05200(ALL)04/94] If your vehicle has a manual transaxle:

*[ST05300(ALL)06/92] 1. Put the gearshift lever in 1 (First).

*[ST05400(ALL)01/95] 2. Set the parking brake fully.

[ST05701(ALL)05/94] 3. Rotate the ignition key to the LOCK position.

[ST05801(ALL)02/95] 4. Remove the key from the ignition.

File:cdstz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:15 1996

Starting Your Mystique

43

[ST07325(ALL)04/94] The steering wheel locks when the key is removed.

%*[ST07400(ALL)05/95] If the driver’s door is open while the key is still in the ignition,a warning chime sounds.

*[ST07500(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Always set the parking brake fully and make sure thatthe gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatictransaxle) or in 1 (First) (manual transaxle).

*[ST07575(ALL)01/93] RWARNING

Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone inyour vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselvesor others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle.Further, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closedvehicle could quickly become high enough to causesevere and possibly fatal injuries to people as well asanimals.

%*[ST07700(ALL)03/95] Fuel-Injected Engines

*[ST07850(ALL)03/95] When starting a fuel-injected engine, the most important thingto remember is to avoid pressing down on the acceleratorbefore or during starting. Only use the accelerator when youhave problems getting your vehicle started. See Starting YourEngine in this chapter for details about when to use theaccelerator while you start your vehicle.

File:cdstz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:15 1996

44

*[ST08200(ALL)03/95] Starting Your Vehicle%*[ST08300(ALL)05/94] Preparing to Start Your Vehicle

*[ST08350(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or otherenclosed area. Never sit in a stopped vehicle for morethan a short period of time with the engine running.Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding Against ExhaustFumes in this chapter for more instructions.

*[ST08400(ALL)01/95] Before you start your vehicle, do the following:

*[ST08500(ALL)01/95] 1. Make sure you and all your passengers buckle your safetybelts. See Safety Restraints in the Index for more details.

*[ST08600(ALL)03/95] 2. Make sure your headlamps and other accessories are turnedoff and the parking brake is set.

File:cdstz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:15 1996

Starting Your Mystique

45

[ST08800(ALL)05/94] 3. If you have a manual transaxle, make sure that the parkingbrake is fully set, push the clutch pedal to the floor, and putthe gearshift into Neutral before you turn the key.(Remember, the starter will operate only if the clutch pedalis pushed all the way to the floor.)

[ST08900(ALL)12/94] If you have an automatic transaxle, make sure that thegearshift is in P (Park) and the parking brake is set beforeyou turn the key.

*[ST09100(ALL)03/95] Before you start your vehicle, you should test the warning lightson the instrument panel to make sure that they work. Refer tothe Warning Lights and Gauges chapter.

*[ST09310(ALL)02/95] Starting Your Engine

*[ST09320(ALL)02/95] To start your engine:

*[ST09330(ALL)05/95] 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to Start Your Vehicle at thebeginning of this section.

*[ST09340(ALL)03/95] 2. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and turn the ignition keyto the ON position.

*[ST09350(ALL)03/95] 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when starting yourengine. DO NOT use the accelerator while the vehicle isparked.

*[ST09360(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the key to the START position (cranking) until theengine starts. Allow the key to return to the ON positionafter the engine has started.

*[ST09370(ALL)02/95] If you have difficulty in turning the key, rotate the steeringwheel slightly because it may be binding.

File:cdstz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:15 1996

46

%*[ST09372(ALL)04/95] For a cold engine:

[ST09375(ALL)05/95] 2.0L engine:

[ST09380(ALL)06/95] ■ At temperatures below -10˚F (-23˚C): Turn the key to ON,crank the engine and depress the accelerator about 1/4 ofthe way down and hold that position for five (5) seconds. Ifthe engine fails to start, continue to crank with theaccelerator depressed about 1/4 of the way down and holdthat position until the engine starts. DO NOT crank formore than 30 seconds, or you could damage the starter. Ifthe engine fails to start on the first try, turn the key to OFFand wait two (2) minutes before trying again. Allow engineto warm up for a few minutes before putting transaxle intogear.

[ST09385(ALL)05/95] ■ At temperatures between -10˚F (-23˚C) and 10˚F (-12˚C):Turn the key to ON, and crank the engine for five (5)seconds. If the engine fails to start, continue to crank anddepress the accelerator about 1/4 of the way down and holdthat position until the engine starts. DO NOT crank formore than 30 seconds, or you could damage the starter. Ifthe engine fails to start on the first try, turn the key to OFFand wait two (2) minutes before trying again.

[ST09391(ALL)05/95] ■ At temperatures between 10˚F (-12˚C) and 32˚F (0˚C): If theengine does not start in fifteen (15) seconds on first try, turnthe key to OFF, then try again.

[ST09395(ALL)05/95] ■ At temperatures above 32˚F (0˚C): If the engine does notstart in five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF,then try again.

[ST09401(ALL)05/95] If you have the 4-cylinder 2.0L engine and are not using anengine block heater, warm up the engine for a minute or twobefore putting the transaxle in gear. Depressing the acceleratorslightly will also help with cold starts.

File:cdstz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:15 1996

Starting Your Mystique

47

[ST09405(ALL)05/95] 2.5L engine:

*[ST09411(ALL)05/95] ■ At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: If the engine doesnot start in fifteen (15) seconds on the first try, turn the keyto OFF, wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do notflood the engine, then try again.

[ST09415(ALL)05/95] ■ At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If the engine does notstart in five (5) seconds on the first try, wait approximatelyten (10) seconds so you do not flood the engine, then tryagain.

%*[ST09421(ALL)05/95] For a warm engine:

[ST09425(ALL)05/95] ■ Do not hold the key in the START position for more thanfive (5) seconds at a time. If the engine does not start withinfive (5) seconds on the first try, wait a few seconds after thestarter stops, then try again.

*[ST09430(ALL)05/95] Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as theengine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter orflood the engine.

*[ST09435(ALL)05/95] After you start the engine, let it idle for a few seconds. Keepyour foot on the brake pedal and put the gearshift lever in gear.Release the parking brake. Slowly release the brake pedal anddrive away in the normal manner.

*[ST09440(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with an automatictransaxle, your vehicle has an interlock that preventsyou from shifting out of P (Park) unless your foot ison the brake pedal.

%*[ST09480(ALL)04/95] If the engine does not start after two attempts:

[ST09494(ALL)01/95] 1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

[ST09496(ALL)01/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to the START position.

[ST09497(ALL)01/95] 3. Release the ignition key when the engine starts.

[ST09498(ALL)01/95] 4. Release the accelerator gradually as the engine speeds up.Then drive away in the normal manner.

File:cdstz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:15 1996

48

*[ST09500(ALL)04/95] If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump shut-off switchmay have been triggered. For directions on how to reset theswitch see Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter.

%*[ST10200(ALL)05/95] A computer system controls the engine’s idle speed. When youstart your vehicle, the engine’s idle speed normally runs high.These faster engine speeds will make your vehicle move slightlyfaster than its normal idle speed. It should, however, slow downafter a short time. If it does not, have the idle speed checked.

*[ST10250(ALL)05/95] If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, donot allow your vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes. Havethe vehicle checked.

*[ST10325(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce veryhigh temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,creating the risk of fire or other damage.

*[ST10350(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass orother dry ground cover. The emission system heats upthe engine compartment and exhaust system, which canstart a fire.

*[ST10500(ALL)03/95] If you consistently start your vehicle in subzero temperatures,use an engine block heater (if your vehicle has this option).

File:cdstz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:15 1996

Starting Your Mystique

49

%*[ST10600(ALL)06/95] Engine Block Heater (If equipped)

*[ST10700(ALL)03/95] Engine block heaters are strongly recommended if you live in aregion where temperatures reach -10˚F (-23˚C) or below. Anengine block heater warms the engine coolant, which improvesstarting, warms up the engine faster, and allows theheater-defrost system to respond quickly.

*[ST10900(ALL)01/95] To turn the heater on, simply plug it into a grounded 110-voltoutlet. Ford recommends that you use a 110-volt circuit that isprotected by a ground fault circuit interrupter.

*[ST11100(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater withungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)adapters.

*[ST11150(ALL)03/95] For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours beforeyou start your vehicle. Using the heater for longer than threehours will not damage the engine, so you can plug it in at nightto start your vehicle the following morning.

File:cdstz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:15 1996

50

*[ST11200(ALL)03/95] If the Engine Cranks but Does Not Start orDoes Not Start After a Collision

%*[ST11300(ALL)04/95] Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch

*[ST11400(ALL)03/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or does not start after acollision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have beentriggered. The shut-off switch is a device intended to stop thefuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantialjolt.

[ST11500(ALL)01/95] Once the shut-off switch is triggered, you must reset the switchby hand before you can start your vehicle. The switch is locatedon the left hand kick panel in the driver’s footwell.

[ST11600(ALL)01/95]

13-1/2 pica

art:0000530-D The left-hand kick panel in the driver’s footwell

File:cdstz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:15 1996

Starting Your Mystique

51

*[ST11700(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the switch or try tostart your vehicle. Have all the passengers get out of thevehicle and call the local fire department or a towingservice.

*[ST11800(ALL)03/95] If your engine cranks but does not start after a collision orsubstantial jolt:

*[ST11900(ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

*[ST12000(ALL)03/95] 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel.

*[ST12050(ALL)03/95] 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the red reset buttondown. If the button is already set, you may have a differentmechanical problem.

*[ST12100(ALL)03/95] 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position for a few seconds,then turn it to the OFF position.

*[ST12150(ALL)03/95] 5. Check under the vehicle again for leaking fuel. If you see orsmell fuel, do not start your vehicle again. If you do notsee or smell fuel, you can try to start your vehicle again.

*[ST12175(ALL)03/95] 6. Check all vehicle warning lights before driving the vehicle.

File:cdstz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:15 1996

52

%*[ST12300(ALL)05/95] Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

*[ST12400(ALL)02/95] Carbon monoxide, although colorless and odorless, is present inexhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.

*[ST12500(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or otherenclosed area. Never sit in a stopped vehicle for morethan a short period of time with the engine running.Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding Against ExhaustFumes in this chapter for more instructions.

*[ST12600(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do notdrive if you smell exhaust fumes.

*[ST12700(ALL)01/95] Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checkedwhenever:

*[ST12800(ALL)02/95] ■ your vehicle is raised for service

*[ST12900(ALL)02/95] ■ the sound of the exhaust system changes

*[ST13000(ALL)01/95] ■ your vehicle has been damaged in a collision

*[ST13200(ALL)01/95] Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear ofsnow, leaves, and other debris.

*[ST13300(ALL)03/95] If the engine is idling while you are stopped in an open areafor long periods of time, open the windows at least one inch(2.5 cm). Also, adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring inoutside air.

[ST13500(ALL)11/93] If you use the heater, set the fan speed on medium or high withthe function control knob turned to FLR, PNL/FLR or PANEL.

[ST13800(ALL)12/88] If you use the air conditioner, set the fan speed on medium orhigh with the A/C button pressed. (Do not use MAX A/C.)

File:cdstz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:15 1996

53

Warning Lights and Gauges

*[LG01150( Z)06/93] In your vehicle, the warning lights and gauges are groupedtogether on the instrument panel. We call this grouping acluster.

[LG01250( Z)02/94] Your vehicle has a sport cluster.

File:cdlgz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:00 1996

54

[LG01600(A

LL)05/9

5]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

00

01

2-G

The

sportcluster

File:cdlgz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:00 1996

Warning Lights and Gauges

55

[LG01900( Z)03/95] Sport Cluster[LG02000( Z)02/94] The following warning lights and gauges are on the sport

cluster. All of the warning lights and gauges alert you topossible problems with your vehicle. The following sectionsdetail what each of these indicators means.

*[LG02400(ALL)01/95] Indicator Lights and Chimes%*[LG02500(ALL)05/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime

*[LG02612(ALL)01/95] This warning light and chime remind you to fasten your safetybelt. The following conditions will take place:

*[LG02614(ALL)03/95] ■ If the driver’s safety belt is not buckled when the ignition isturned to the ON position, the light will turn on for 1 to 2minutes and the chime will sound for 4 to 8 seconds.

*[LG02616(ALL)03/95] ■ If the driver’s safety belt is buckled while the light is on orthe chime is sounding, both the light and the chime will turnoff.

*[LG02618(ALL)03/95] ■ If the driver’s safety belt is buckled before the ignition isturned to the ON position, neither the light nor the chimewill turn on.

[LG02800(ALL)01/95]

6 pica art:0000291-C

File:cdlgz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:00 1996

56

*[LG02900(ALL)03/95] Brake System Warning Light

*[LG03000(ALL)03/95] The warning light for the brakes can show two things — thatthe parking brake is not fully released, or that the brake fluidlevel is low in the master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level islow, the brake system should be checked by a qualified servicetechnician.

[LG03400(ALL)01/95]

6 pica art:0000971-D

*[LG03500(ALL)01/95] This light comes on when the parking brake is set, or if it is notset, it comes on briefly when you turn the ignition to theSTART position. It normally goes off shortly after the enginestarts and you release the parking brake. If the light stays onafter you have fully released the parking brake, have thehydraulic brake system serviced by your dealer or a qualifiedservice technician.

*[LG03700(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes may not beworking properly. Have the brakes checked immediately.

File:cdlgz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:00 1996

Warning Lights and Gauges

57

*[LG03800(ALL)01/95] Charging System Light

*[LG03900(ALL)03/95] This light indicates that your battery is not being charged andthat you need to have the electrical system checked.

[LG04100(ALL)01/95]

6 pica art:0000293-C

*[LG04300(ALL)05/95] This light comes on every time you turn the ignition to the ONor START position (engine off). The light should go off whenthe engine starts and the alternator begins to charge.

*[LG04400(ALL)01/95] If the light stays on or comes on when the engine is running,have the electrical system checked as soon as possible.

%*[LG04800(ALL)02/95] Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light

*[LG04900(ALL)01/95] This light indicates the engine’s oil pressure, not the oil level.However, if your engine’s oil level is low, it could affect the oilpressure. The light will come on briefly when you turn yourkey to the START and ON position. The light should stay offwhen the engine is running with normal oil pressure. If thelight comes on while the engine is running, you have lost oilpressure and continued operation will cause severe enginedamage.

[LG05010(ALL)01/95]

6 pica art:0000294-B

File:cdlgz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:00 1996

58

*[LG05105(ALL)03/95] If you lose engine oil pressure:

*[LG05200(ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.

*[LG05300(ALL)11/94] 2. Shut off the engine immediately. If you do not stop theengine as soon as safely possible, severe engine damagecould result.

*[LG05400(ALL)11/94] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following the instructions onchecking and adding engine oil in this Owner Guide. (SeeEngine oil in the Index.) If you do not follow theseinstructions, you or others could be injured. To ensure anaccurate reading, your vehicle should be on level ground.

[LG05500(ALL)11/94] 4. If the level is low, add only as much oil as necessary tobring it to the full level before you start the engine again.Do not overfill. Do not operate the engine if the light is on,regardless of the oil level. Contact your nearest dealer forfurther service actions.

*[LG06200(ALL)01/95] High Beam Light

*[LG06300(ALL)03/95] This light comes on when the headlamps are turned to highbeam or when you flash the lights.

[LG06350(ALL)05/94] If the high beam light flashes in a vehicle equipped with theDaytime Running Light (DRL) system (Canada), it indicates afailure in the DRL circuit. Check the bulbs and fuses or havethe DRL system checked by your dealer or a qualified servicetechnician.

[LG06400(ALL)01/95]

6 pica art:0000295-B

File:cdlgz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:00 1996

Warning Lights and Gauges

59

%*[LG07000(ALL)05/95] Chime for Headlamps On

[LG07100(ALL)05/94] This chime sounds if the driver’s door is open when the parkinglamps or headlamps are on. The chime sounds until you closethe door or turn off the lamps.

*[LG07200(ALL)01/95] Air Bag Readiness Light

*[LG07300(ALL)05/95] The air bag system uses a readiness light and a tone to indicatethe condition of the system. The readiness light is in theinstrument cluster. When you turn the ignition to the ONposition, this light will illuminate for approximately six (6)seconds and then turn off. This indicates that the system isoperating normally. NOTE: Maintenance of the air bag system isnot required.

[LG07400(ALL)05/95] A problem with the system is indicated by one or more of thefollowing: the readiness light will either flash or stay lit, or itwill not light or a group of five beeps will be heard.

*[LG07500(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

If any of these things happen, even intermittently, havethe air bag system serviced at your Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer immediately.

[LG07600(ALL)03/95]

6 pica art:0001212-A

File:cdlgz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:00 1996

60

*[LG07650(ALL)03/95] Check Engine Warning Light

*[LG07750(ALL)05/95] The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II) system consistsof the hardware and software necessary to monitor theoperation of the powertrain. The OBD II system is designed tocheck the function of the vehicle’s powertrain control systemduring normal operation. If an emission problem is detected, theCheck Engine Warning Light (in the cluster) is turned on.

*[LG07800(ALL)05/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle may cause incorrectoperation of the OBD II system. Additions such as burglaralarms, cellular phones, and CB radios must be carefullyinstalled. Do not install these devices by tapping into or runningwires close to powertrain control system wires or components.

[LG07850(ALL)03/95]

6 pica art:0000640-B

*[LG07900(ALL)05/95] This light comes on briefly when you turn the ignition to theON position, but should turn off when the engine starts. If thelight does not come on when you turn the ignition to the ONposition or if it comes on and stays on when you are driving,have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. This indicates apossible problem with one of the engine’s emission controlsystems. You do not need to have your vehicle towed in.

*[LG07950(ALL)05/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) second intervals whileyou are driving the vehicle, it means that the engine ismisfiring. If this condition persists, damage could occur to theengine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicle serviced at thefirst opportunity. You do not need to have your vehicle towedin.

File:cdlgz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:00 1996

Warning Lights and Gauges

61

*[LG08001(ALL)05/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasions while you aredriving, it means that a malfunction occurred and the conditioncorrected itself.

*[LG08050(ALL)05/95] An example of a condition which corrects itself occurs when anengine running out of fuel begins to misfire. In this case, theCheck Engine Warning Light may turn on and will then set aDiagnostic Trouble Code indicating that the engine wasmisfiring while the last of the fuel was being consumed. Afterrefueling, the Check Engine Warning Light will turn off afterthe vehicle has completed three consecutive warm up cycleswithout a misfire condition occurring. A warm up cycle consistsof engine start from a cold condition (engine at ambienttemperature) and running until the engine reaches normaloperating temperature.

*[LG08100(ALL)05/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Check Engine Warning Lightwill turn off as soon as the engine begins to crank. It is notnecessary to have the engine serviced.

*[LG08150(ALL)05/95] Under certain conditions, the Check Engine Warning Light maycome on if the fuel cap is not properly installed. If the CheckEngine Warning Light comes on and you suspect that the fuelcap is not properly installed, pull off the road as soon as it issafely possible and turn off the engine. Remove and replace thefuel cap, making sure it is properly seated.

*[LG08201(ALL)05/95] After completing the three consecutive warm up cycles and onthe fourth engine start up, the Check Engine Warning Lightshould turn off. If the light does not go off after the fourthengine restart, have your vehicle serviced by your dealer or aqualified technician.

File:cdlgz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:00 1996

62

[LG08310(ALL)05/94] Overdrive Off Indicator (Automatic Transaxle Only)

[LG08320(ALL)02/95] This light tells you that the Transaxle Control Switch (TCS) onthe gearshift lever has been pushed. When the light is on, thetransaxle will not shift into overdrive. Depressing the TCSbutton located below the gearshift release button on the shifterwill return the vehicle to “overdrive on” mode. The transaxlewill be in the “overdrive on” mode when the vehicle is startedeven if the O/D OFF mode was selected when the vehicle waslast shut off.

[LG08330(ALL)05/95] If the light does not come on when the TCS is depressed or ifthe light flashes when you are driving, have your vehicleserviced at the first opportunity.

[LG08340(ALL)01/95]

6 pica art:0001211-A

*[LG08368(ALL)05/95] Turn Signal Indicator Lights

[LG08375(ALL)05/95] The turn signal arrow will flash to indicate the direction inwhich you are going to be turning.

[LG08385(ALL)05/95]

6 pica art:0050190-A

File:cdlgz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:00 1996

Warning Lights and Gauges

63

*[LG08400(ALL)01/95] Fuel Gauge

*[LG08500(ALL)01/95] The fuel gauge displays approximately how much fuel you havein the fuel tank.

[LG08550(ALL)01/95] For proper fuel gauge operation, the ignition must be in theOFF position before you add fuel to the fuel tank.

*[LG08600(ALL)01/95] The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly while the vehicle isin motion. This is the result of fuel movement within the tank.An accurate reading may be obtained with the vehicle onsmooth, level ground.

*[LG08800(ALL)01/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

*[LG08900(ALL)03/95] This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, notthe coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level ormixture, the gauge indication will not be accurate.

[LG09000(ALL)05/94] The pointer moves from the white mark into the NORMALband as the engine coolant warms up. It is acceptable for thepointer to fluctuate within the NORMAL band under normaldriving conditions. Under certain driving conditions, such asheavy stop and go traffic or driving up hills in hot weather, thepointer may indicate at the top of the NORMAL band.

[LG09015(ALL)02/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001097-BThe engine coolant temperature gauge

File:cdlgz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:00 1996

64

*[LG09100(ALL)05/95] If, under any circumstances, the pointer moves above theNORMAL band, the engine coolant is overheating andcontinued operation may cause engine damage.

*[LG09150(ALL)01/95] If your engine coolant overheats:

*[LG09200(ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.

*[LG09300(ALL)01/95] 2. Turn off the engine.

*[LG09400(ALL)05/95] 3. Let the engine cool.

*[LG09410(ALL)04/95] 4. Check the coolant level following the instructions onchecking and adding coolant to your engine, see EngineCoolant in the Index. If you do not follow these instructions,you or others could be injured.

*[LG09415(ALL)01/95] If the coolant continues to overheat, have the coolant systemserviced as soon as possible.

*[LG09800(ALL)01/95] Speedometer

*[LG09900(ALL)01/95] The speedometer tells you how many miles (kilometers) perhour your vehicle is moving.

*[LG10000(ALL)01/95] Odometer

*[LG10100(ALL)01/95] The odometer tells you the total number of miles (kilometers)your vehicle has been driven.

%*[LG10109(ALL)11/94] Trip Odometer

*[LG10116(ALL)11/94] The trip odometer tells you how many miles (kilometers) yourvehicle has been driven since the last reset. Press the resetbutton to return the trip odometer to zero.

*[LG22100(ALL)02/95] Tachometer

*[LG22200(ALL)01/95] The tachometer displays the approximate engine revolutions perminute (rpm), or how fast the engine is running.

*[LG22300(ALL)01/95] If you drive with the tachometer in the red zone, you maydamage the engine.

File:cdlgz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:00 1996

Warning Lights and Gauges

65

%*[LG22400(ALL)02/95] Anti-lock Brake System Warning Light (If equipped)

[LG22500(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle may have an Anti-lock Brake System feature. If itdoes, check the Anti-lock Brake System light each time you startthe engine. If it stays on longer than three (3) seconds, shut offthe engine and restart. If it stays on, that means the Anti-lockBrake feature is not working and should be servicedimmediately to restore the benefits of the Anti-lock feature.Normal braking is not affected unless the brake warning light isalso lit.

[LG22600(ALL)04/95] The Anti-Lock Brake System has self-check capabilities. Asdescribed above, the system turns on the anti-lock light eachtime you start your engine. After the engine is started and theanti-lock light turns off, the system performs another test thefirst time the vehicle reaches 5 mph (8 km/h) (between 12 and25 mph [20 and 40 km/h] for vehicles equipped with thetraction control system). The system turns on the ABS pumpmotor for approximately 1/2 second. At this time, a mechanicalnoise may be heard and felt. This is a normal part of theself-check feature. If a malfunction is found during this checkthe anti-lock light will come on.

[LG22700(ALL)01/95]

6 pica art:0001210-A

File:cdlgz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:00 1996

66

% [LG22800(ALL)03/95] Low Coolant Light (If equipped)

[LG22900(ALL)02/95] This light indicates that the level of the engine coolant is lowinside the coolant recovery bottle and that you should add morecoolant. See Engine Coolant in the Index.

[LG23000(ALL)01/95]

6 pica art:0001214-B

[LG23100(ALL)03/95] This light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition isturned to the START position, but should turn off when theengine starts. If this light stays on, check the level of coolantinside the recovery bottle. The level may be slightly above theMIN line because the light is an “early warning.”

[LG23600(ALL)05/94] Traction Control System Light (If equipped)

[LG23700(ALL)05/95] This light comes on when the traction control system has beendisengaged. It may come on or flash on and off while tractioncontrol is operating.

[LG23800(ALL)05/95] If the light stays on for more than three (3) seconds after theignition is turned to the ON position or does not come on whenthe T/C OFF button is pressed, have the traction control systemchecked by a qualified technician as soon as possible.

[LG23900(ALL)01/95]

6 pica art:0001213-A

File:cdlgz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:08:00 1996

67

Instrument Panel Controls

*[IP00310(ALL)01/95] The instrument panel (dashboard) on your vehicle is dividedinto several different sections. The illustrations on the followingpages show the major parts of the instrument panel that aredescribed in this chapter. Some items shown may not be on allvehicles.

[IP00400(ALL)05/95] The main controls for the climate control system, clock, andradio are on the instrument panel.

*[IP00420(ALL)03/95] Clean the instrument panel lens and woodtone trim with a softcloth and a glass cleaner. Do not use paper towel or anyabrasive cleaner to clean either the lens or the woodtone trim asthese may cause scratches.

%*[IP00430(ALL)05/95] NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases the gloss (shine)of the upper part of the instrument panel should beavoided. The dull finish in this area is to help protectthe driver from undesirable windshield reflection.

File:cdipz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:07:15 1996

68

[IP0

04

75

(Z

)05

/95

]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

01

29

9-B

File:cdipz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 11:07:15 1996

Instrument Panel Controls

69

*[IP00500(ALL)01/95] The Climate Control Systems[IP00625(ALL)01/95] Your vehicle has one of the following:

[IP00800(ALL)02/94] ■ Heating Only System (Without Air Conditioning)

*[IP00900(ALL)02/95] ■ Heating and Air Conditioning System

*[IP01100(ALL)09/89] If you are not sure which system your vehicle has, see thediagrams on the following pages.

[IP01201(ALL)03/95] Heating Only System

[IP01220(ALL)05/94] The control for your heater system is located at the center of theinstrument panel below the radio. The heater will operate onlywhen the ignition key is turned to the ON position. Your heaterwill heat and/or ventilate your vehicle interior depending onthe function selector knob position and temperature you select.The function selector knob allows you to select heating orventilation and determine where the air will be directed. Thetemperature control knob setting determines the temperature ofthe air that flows into the vehicle.

[IP01275( Z)03/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001301-AThe control for the heating only system

File:cdipz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:07:15 1996

70

[IP01300(ALL)05/94] To turn your heater system on, select any position except OFF.This will turn the fan on and allow air flow into the vehicle. Toturn your heater off, select OFF. This will turn the fan off andstop air flow from coming into the vehicle.

[IP01325(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle also has small demister openings on each frontdoor near the window. This allows a small amount of air flowto be directed onto the door glass to reduce fogging wheneverthe heater system is operating.

[IP01375(ALL)03/95] The temperature control knob is located at the right side of thecontrol with a broken RED and BLUE band around the top andsides of the knob. The all RED part of the band (full right) isthe heat or warmer area. The all BLUE area (full left) is the coolor unheated temperature area. Any position selected betweenfull right and full left will give a temperature between the twoextreme temperatures. The cool temperature you select will notbe cooler than the outside temperature if your vehicle is notequipped with an air conditioner.

*[IP01400(ALL)03/95] H Fan speed adjustment

[IP01401(ALL)03/95] The H (left) knob on the control is the fan speed knob whichcontrols the volume of air flow. Rotate the H knob to HI toincrease fan speed and increase the amount of air entering thevehicle. Four fan speed positions are available and are indicatedby LO, two single dots and HI beside the H control knob.

*[IP01425(ALL)03/95] Air flow selections

[IP01451(ALL)03/95] PANEL

[IP01475(ALL)05/94] Use PANEL to bring outside air through the instrument panelregisters. You can heat the air in this position by rotating thetemperature control knob into the RED area. The air CANNOTbe cooled below the outside temperature regardless of thetemperature control knob setting.

File:cdipz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:07:15 1996

Instrument Panel Controls

71

[IP01500(ALL)03/95] PNL/FLR

[IP01525(ALL)03/95] Select PNL/FLR to get air flow to the floor and through theinstrument panel registers at the same time. This selection canbe used to either heat or ventilate your vehicle.

*[IP01551(ALL)03/95] FLOOR

[IP01575(ALL)05/94] Air flow will be to the floor when FLOOR is selected. The aircannot be cooled in the FLOOR position but can be heated byrotating the temperature control knob into the RED area.

[IP01600(ALL)03/95] FLR/DEF

[IP01625(ALL)05/94] Select FLR/DEF to get air to the floor and windshield defrostersat the same time.

*[IP01651(ALL)03/95] V DEF

[IP01675(ALL)05/95] Select V DEF to obtain maximum air flow to the windshield.Rotate the temperature control knob into the RED area for theair temperature required to defrost. Rotate the H knob toincrease the air flow.

File:cdipz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:07:15 1996

72

[IP01850(ALL)04/95] Heating and Air Conditioning System

[IP01875(ALL)03/95] Heating, ventilation, defrosting and defogging are accomplishedin the same way as with the heating only system. See “HeatingOnly System.”

[IP01890(ALL)03/95] With the heating and air conditioning system, if the outsidetemperature is about 50˚F (10˚C) or warmer, the air will bedehumidified to remove moisture if you select FLR/DEF or VDEF.

[IP01925( Z)03/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001302-AThe control for the heating and air conditioning system

[IP02150(ALL)04/95] Air conditioning

*[IP02175(ALL)03/95] A/C

[IP02200(ALL)05/94] Select A/C to get refrigerated outside air through theinstrument panel registers. The A/C position is used for coolingexcept when extremely hot or fast cooling of the vehicle isneeded. Then, select MAX A/C for fast cooling and return toA/C when you are comfortable.

File:cdipz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:07:15 1996

Instrument Panel Controls

73

*[IP02225(ALL)03/95] MAX A/C

[IP02251(ALL)05/95] The MAX A/C position produces cool air more rapidly toprovide faster cooling of your vehicle. Thhis is possible becausecooler air is drawn from inside the passenger area andrefrigerated again instead of using warmer outside air. Usinginside air will also make the fan sound louder, which is normalwhen using MAX A/C. The air flow will be from theinstrument panel registers.

[IP02475(ALL)03/95] Comfort tips

[IP02501(ALL)03/95] The following tips will help you to get the most satisfactionfrom your climate control system.

[IP02525(ALL)05/95] ■ In humid weather, select V DEF before starting yourengine. This will help to prevent windshield fogging. After afew minutes of operation, you may select another function.

[IP02550(ALL)03/95] ■ To prevent humidity buildup inside your vehicle, alwaysdrive with the climate control system turned on.

*[IP02575(ALL)03/95] ■ Do not put objects under the front seats that interfere withthe flow of air to the back seat area.

[IP02600(ALL)05/94] ■ Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the air intake area ofyour heater and air conditioner system which could blockthe air intake. The intake area is located at the bottom of thewindshield.

[IP03025(ALL)04/95] Passenger Compartment Air Filter

*[IP03050(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle may have an air filter that removes pollen androad dust from outside air before it is directed to the interior ofthe vehicle. For maintenance of this filter, see Servicing YourMystique.

File:cdipz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:07:15 1996

74

% [IP03500(ALL)05/95] Rear Window Defroster and Heated Side ViewMirrors (If equipped)

[IP03551(ALL)02/95] The defroster for the rear window clears frost, fog, or thin icefrom both the inside and outside of the rear window andactivates the heated side view mirrors.

[IP03600(ALL)01/95] The button for the rear window defroster and heated side viewmirrors is on the instrument panel, to the right of the steeringwheel.

[IP03700(ALL)02/94]

6 pica art:0001180-B

The rear window defroster and heated side view mirrors

[IP03900(ALL)05/95] Clear away any snow that is on the rear window and side viewmirrors before using the defroster. With the engine running,push the defroster button.

*[IP04000(ALL)04/95] After approximately 10 minutes, the defroster will turn off. Ifthe window or mirrors are still not clear, turn the defroster onagain.

*[IP04100(ALL)04/95] The defroster will turn off when the ignition key is turned tothe OFF or START position.

*[IP23000(ALL)03/94] NOTE: Never use sharp instruments or window cleaners withabrasives to clean the inside of your rear window. Ifyou do, you may damage the heating elements thatare bonded to the inside of the rear window andcause damage to the rear window defroster.

File:cdipz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:07:15 1996

Instrument Panel Controls

75

*[IP23600(ALL)01/95] The Interior and Exterior Lights

*[IP23700(ALL)01/95] Turning On the Exterior Lights

[IP23800(ALL)05/95] To turn on your headlamps, parking lamps, and tail lamps, usethe knob that is on the instrument panel, to the left of thesteering wheel.

[IP24100( Z)05/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001311-BThe knob for the exterior lights

[IP24300(ALL)05/95] To turn on the parking lamps and tail lamps, turn the knobclockwise to the first position.

[IP24400(ALL)05/95] To turn on the headlamps, parking lamps and tail lamps, turnthe knob clockwise to the second position.

File:cdipz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:07:15 1996

76

%*[IP24700( Z)05/95] Cleaning the Exterior Lamps

[IP25000(ALL)01/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001186-DTurning on the high beams

[IP25100(ALL)05/95] To change the headlamps from low to high beam, push thelever away from you until it latches, and release. The high beamindicator in the instrument cluster glows when the headlampsare on high beam. To change the headlamps from high beam tolow beam, pull the lever toward you until it latches.

*[IP25200(ALL)04/95] Fog Lamps (If equipped)

[IP25220(ALL)05/94] The fog lamps act as a supplement to the low beam headlampsunder limited visibility conditions such as rain, snow, dust orfog.

[IP25300(ALL)05/94] The fog lamps operate only when the low beam headlamps areon. To operate the fog lamps, turn the headlamp control knobto the second position (headlamps on) and pull the knob out.An indicator lamp will glow when the fog lamps are on.

[IP25325(ALL)02/94] To turn off, push the headlamp control knob in.

*[IP25401(ALL)02/93] To maximize fog lamp bulb life it is recommended that the foglamp switch be turned off after each use prior to turning off theheadlamps.

File:cdipz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:07:15 1996

Instrument Panel Controls

77

*[IP25605(ALL)01/95] Daytime Running Light System

*[IP25610(ALL)03/95] (Canadian vehicles only)

*[IP25615(ALL)03/95] The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system is designed to turnthe high beam headlamps on, with a reduced light output andwithout illuminating the high beam indicator lamp in theinstrument panel. The DRL system operates when all of thefollowing conditions are met:

*[IP25620(ALL)03/95] ■ The vehicle is “running.”

*[IP25630(ALL)03/95] ■ The headlamp system is in the OFF position.

*[IP25632(ALL)05/95] The high beam indicator light on the instrument cluster will notbe on.

[IP25633(ALL)05/94] A flashing high beam light in the instrument cluster indicates afailure in the DRL system circuit, like a burnt bulb or fuse.

*[IP25638(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system will notilluminate the tail lamps and parking lamps. Turn onyour headlamps at dusk. Failure to do so may result in acollision.

[IP25700(ALL)06/95] Cleaning the Exterior Lamps

*[IP25800(ALL)05/95] Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solvents or abrasivecleaners to clean the lamps, as these may cause scratches orcrack the lamps.

*[IP29800(ALL)01/95] Lighting Up the Interior and Instrument Panel

[IP29850(ALL)05/94] When either front door is opened, the footwell lights and thedoor courtesy lights come on.

[IP29900(ALL)05/94] The instrument panel lights, window control lights and doorhandle lights come on whenever the headlamp switch is turnedfrom the OFF position. To dim the instrument panel lights, usethe thumbwheel on the instrument panel to the right of thesteering wheel.

File:cdipz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:07:15 1996

78

[IP30001(ALL)03/95]

6 pica art:0001177-B

Dimming the instrument panel lights

[IP32600(ALL)02/94] Dome Lamp

[IP32701( Z)02/94] Your vehicle has two dome lamps, one above the front seat andone above the back seat. The switch on the dome lamp turnsthat dome lamp on and off.

[IP32801( Z)02/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0001219-A

The switches on the dome lamp (front lamp shown, rear lamp similar)

[IP32900(ALL)11/93] Dome lamp delay

[IP33000(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle may have a dome lamp delay. If you set theswitch on the dome lamp to the 12-second delay position, thedome lamp will turn on when either front door is opened.

[IP33100(ALL)11/93] The dome lamp will turn off after 12 seconds or when theignition key is turned to the ON or ACC position. It will notturn off if either front door is open or if you move the domelamp switch to the ON position.

*[IP33125(ALL)04/95] Your interior dome lamps and map lamps are plastic andshould be cleaned with a mild detergent diluted in water. Rinsethem with clear water.

File:cdipz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:07:15 1996

Instrument Panel Controls

79

[IP33150(ALL)01/95] Turning On the Map Lamps (If equipped)

*[IP33200(ALL)01/94] Your vehicle may have a map lamp for the passenger and onefor the driver.

[IP33250(ALL)11/93]

7-1/2 pica art:0001218-A

Turning on the map lamps

[IP33400(ALL)11/93] Traction Control System (If equipped)[IP33500(ALL)05/94] This button turns the traction control system off and on. See

Driving Your Vehicle for more information.

[IP33600(ALL)05/94]

6 pica art:0001179-C

The button for the traction control system

File:cdipz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:07:15 1996

80

[IP33700(ALL)11/93] Clock[IP34200( Z)04/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0001296-A

The digital clock

*[IP34300(ALL)05/95] 1. To set the hour, press and hold the hour button. When thedesired hour appears, release the button.

*[IP34400(ALL)05/95] 2. To set the minutes, press and hold the minute button. Whenthe desired minute appears, release the button.

[IP34500(ALL)01/95] 3. To switch between a 12-hour clock and a 24-hour clock,press both the hour and minute buttons at the same time.Reset the time as above.

File:cdipz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:07:15 1996

81

Steering Column Controls

*[SC00400(ALL)01/95] The controls on the steering column and wheel are designed togive you easy access to the controls while you are driving.

*[SC00500(ALL)01/95] The Turn Signal Lever

*[SC00600(ALL)01/95] You can use the turn signal lever on the left side of the steeringcolumn to:

*[SC00700(ALL)03/95] ■ operate the turn signals and cornering lamps

*[SC00800(ALL)01/95] ■ turn the high beams on/off

*[SC00900(ALL)05/95] ■ flash the lamps

*[SC01100(ALL)01/95] Turn Signals

[SC01200(ALL)01/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001186-DThe turn signal lever

*[SC01300(ALL)03/95] Move the lever up to signal a right turn. Move it down tosignal a left turn. The corresponding indicator light in theinstrument cluster will flash.

*[SC01400(ALL)03/95] If the turn signal stays on after you turn, move the lever backto the center (off) position.

*[SC01500(ALL)03/95] For lane changes, move the lever far enough to signal but not tolatch. The lever will return to the off position when you releaseit.

File:cdscz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:33 1996

82

*[SC02800(ALL)05/95] High Beams and Flashing the Lamps

[SC02900(ALL)05/95] To turn on the high beams, turn the headlamp control knob tothe headlamp ON position and push the turn signal lever awayfrom you until it latches. When the high beams are on, the highbeam indicator light on the instrument cluster comes on.

[SC03000(ALL)10/93] To turn off the high beams, pull the lever back to the offposition.

*[SC03400(ALL)06/95] To flash the headlamps, pull the lever toward you for a momentand then release it. The headlamps will flash whether theheadlamp knob is in the on or off position.

*[SC03700(ALL)03/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer

*[SC03800(ALL)03/95] To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignition key must beturned to the ON or ACC position.

[SC04400(ALL)05/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001189-DUsing the windshield wiper

[SC04500(ALL)02/94] The windshield wipers can be set on high, low speed or intervalwipe. Turn the ring on the lever to set a longer or shorter pausebetween wiping cycles.

File:cdscz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:33 1996

Steering Column Controls

83

*[SC04950(ALL)05/95] Windshield Washer

[SC05000(ALL)01/95] When the lever is pulled to activate the windshield washer, thewipers operate for about three cycles after the spray stops.

[SC05110(ALL)05/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0001194-D

Washing the windshield

*[SC05310(ALL)01/95] Do not try to clean the windshield when the washer fluidcontainer is empty or activate the washers at any time for morethan 15 seconds continuously. This could damage the washerpump system.

*[SC05350(ALL)01/93] RWARNING

In freezing weather, the washer solution may freeze onthe windshield and obscure your vision. Always warmup the windshield with the defroster before you use thewasher fluid. If you cannot see through the windshieldclearly, it can increase the risk of being involved in acollision.

*[SC05500(ALL)04/95] For information about refilling the washer fluid or replacingyour windshield wiper blades, see Windshield washer fluid andWipers in the Index.

File:cdscz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:33 1996

84

*[SC05520(ALL)03/95] Hazard Flasher

*[SC05530(ALL)03/95] The hazard flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to becareful when approaching or passing your vehicle.

[SC05540(ALL)05/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001193-AUsing the hazard flasher switch

*[SC05590(ALL)03/95] The flashers work whether your vehicle is running or not. Theflashers work for up to two hours when the battery is fullycharged and in good condition without draining the batteryexcessively. If the flashers run for longer than two hours or ifthe battery is not fully charged, the battery can be drained.

*[SC05600(ALL)01/95] Horn

*[SC05800(ALL)03/94] To sound the horn, push the pad in the center of the steeringwheel. Check the horn regularly to be sure it operates properly.

File:cdscz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:33 1996

Steering Column Controls

85

*[SC07400(ALL)03/91] Speed Control (If equipped)

*[SC07500(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle has speed control, you can automaticallymaintain a constant speed at or above 30 mph (50 km/h).

*[SC07550(ALL)05/95] Use of radio transmitting equipment that is not FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) or in Canada the CanadianRadio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) approvedmay cause the speed control to malfunction. Therefore, use onlyproperly installed FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radiotransmitting equipment in your vehicle.

*[SC07650(ALL)03/95] NOTE: Do not shift to N (Neutral) when using the speedcontrol. This will cause the engine to overspeed.

*[SC07675(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roadsthat are winding, slippery, or unpaved.

[SC07700(ALL)05/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0000262-DThe speed control switches on the steering wheel

File:cdscz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:33 1996

86

[SC08200(ALL)04/95] Setting the speed control

*[SC08400(ALL)06/95] 1. Press and release the ON switch.

*[SC08500(ALL)06/95] 2. Accelerate to the desired speed above 30 mph (50 km/h)using the accelerator pedal.

[SC08800(ALL)05/95] 3. Press the SET ACC switch and release it immediately to setyour speed. If you keep this switch depressed, your speedwill continue to increase.

[SC08900(ALL)05/95] 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle willmaintain the speed you set.

*[SC09000(ALL)06/95] If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle maymomentarily slow down or speed up, even though the speedcontrol is on. This is normal.

File:cdscz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:33 1996

Steering Column Controls

87

[SC09010(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with an automatictransaxle, and if your speed increases above your setspeed while driving in Overdrive on a downhillgrade, you may want to turn the Overdrive off anduse Drive. You may turn the Overdrive off bypressing the Transaxle Control Switch on the left sideof the gearshift lever. This will reduce vehicle speedif it goes above your set speed on a downhill grade.For the best fuel economy during normal drivingconditions, leave the vehicle in Overdrive, or resumeas soon as possible.

[SC09020(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a 5-speed manualtransaxle, and if your speed increases above your setspeed while driving in 5 (Fifth) gear on a downhillgrade, you may want to shift to 4 (Fourth) gear toreduce vehicle speed. Depressing the clutch pedalcancels speed control, therefore speed control must bereset by pressing the SET/ACC or RES buttons. Speedcontrol cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it goesabove your set speed on a downhill grade.

[SC09150(ALL)05/94] Speed control is cancelled when Traction Control (if equipped)becomes active.

File:cdscz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:33 1996

88

%*[SC09200(ALL)06/95] Accelerating With the Speed Control Operating

*[SC09300(ALL)05/95] You can use the accelerator pedal to speed up momentarily.When you take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle willreturn to the set speed.

*[SC09400(ALL)01/95] Resetting the Speed Control

*[SC09410(ALL)03/95] To reset the speed control to a lower speed, use one of thefollowing procedures:

*[SC09415(ALL)03/95] ■ COAST — Press and hold the COAST switch. Release theswitch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.

[SC09420(ALL)05/94] ■ Tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desiredspeed, press the SET ACC switch and release it immediately.

[SC09427(ALL)05/94] ■ TAP-DOWN — Press and then quickly release the COASTswitch. Each time you “tap” the switch, the set speed willdecrease by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

*[SC09430(ALL)05/95] If vehicle speed is reduced below 30 mph (50 km/h) by any ofthe above methods, then you must manually accelerate to aspeed over 30 mph (50 km/h) and reset the system.

*[SC09435(ALL)03/95] To reset the speed control to a higher speed, follow one ofthese procedures:

[SC09440(ALL)05/94] ■ ACC — Press and hold the SET ACC switch. Release theswitch when the vehicle has accelerated to the desired speed.

[SC09445(ALL)03/95] ■ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains thedesired speed, press and release the SET ACC switch.

[SC09452(ALL)05/94] ■ TAP-UP — Press and then quickly release the SET ACCswitch. Each time you “tap” the switch, the set speed willincrease by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

File:cdscz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:33 1996

Steering Column Controls

89

[SC09500(ALL)05/95] To Cancel Speed Control

[SC09600(ALL)05/95] Speed control can be cancelled at any time by pressing thebrake pedal slightly. After cancelling, you can return to thespeed you set by pressing the RES switch, or set a new speedby pressing the SET ACC or COAST switch.

%*[SC10900(ALL)06/95] Cancelling and Resuming a Set Speed

[SC11000(ALL)05/95] If you press the brake pedal, the speed control is suspended.You can return to the set speed by pressing the RES switch, aslong as you did not press the OFF switch. You must be drivingat least 30 mph (50 km/h).

*[SC11300(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle will gradually return to the previously set speedand then maintain it.

%*[SC11360(ALL)05/95] To Turn Off the Speed Control System

*[SC11370(ALL)05/95] Press the OFF switch.

*[SC11380(ALL)05/95] In addition, the speed control is turned off each time you turnthe vehicle off.

File:cdscz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:33 1996

91

Features

*[FV00401(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle has a variety of features designed for yourcomfort, convenience and safety. Read this chapter to find outabout standard and optional features.

*[FV00500(ALL)01/95] Doors%*[FV01000(ALL)02/95] Childproof Locks for the Rear Doors

[FV01100(ALL)05/94] In addition to standard or power locks, your vehicle haschildproof locks for the rear doors. If you set these locks, therear doors cannot be opened from the inside of the vehicle. Thedoors can still be opened from the outside if the doors areunlocked.

[FV01200(ALL)11/93]

17-1/2 pica

art:0001247-AThe childproof locks for the rear door

*[FV01220(ALL)03/95] To set the childproof lock on each rear door, open the reardoor.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

92

[FV01240(ALL)01/95] Find the lever at the black label with word LOCKED in whiteletters. Move the lever toward the inside of the door.

*[FV01260(ALL)03/95] To release the childproof lock, open the rear door from theoutside.

[FV01280(ALL)01/95] Move the lever toward the outside of the door.

*[FV01300(ALL)04/95] Power Door Locks (If equipped)

[FV01400(ALL)01/95] If your vehicle has power door locks, the controls to lock thedoors are on the trim panel of the front door. When you closethe doors after you set the door locks, the doors remain locked.If the power mechanism fails, the manual door lock willautomatically override the power controls.

[FV01500(ALL)05/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001250-BThe power door lock on the driver’s door

%*[FV01530(ALL)01/95] Using the Illuminated Entry System (If equipped)

[FV01560(ALL)05/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the illuminated entry system,the interior lights turn on when you lift the outside door handleon either front door.

[FV01590(ALL)01/95] These lights automatically turn off after 12 seconds or when youturn the ignition key to ON or ACC. The inside lights will not

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

Features

93

turn off if you have turned them on with the switch in thedome lamp or if the front door is open.

[FV01600(ALL)05/95] Remote Entry System (If equipped)

*[FV01700(ALL)03/94] If your vehicle has the remote entry system, you can lock andunlock the vehicle doors and open the trunk without using akey. The remote also has a personal alarm feature. The buttonsfor the system are located on the hand held transmitter(s) thatcame with your vehicle.

[FV01800(ALL)02/95] The system will work with up to four transmitters. Additionaltransmitters can be ordered from your dealer.

*[FV01900(ALL)02/95] The remote entry features only operate with the ignition in theOFF position.

[FV02000(ALL)11/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001221-ARemote entry transmitter

%*[FV02100(ALL)02/95] Unlocking the doors and opening the trunk

*[FV02200(ALL)02/95] To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK button.

*[FV02300(ALL)02/95] To unlock the other doors, press the UNLOCK button a secondtime within five seconds of unlocking the driver’s door.

*[FV02400(ALL)02/95] To open the trunk, press the TRUNK button.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

94

[FV02500(ALL)05/94] When you use the remote entry UNLOCK, TRUNK or PANICbuttons, the illuminated entry system turns on the interior lightsfor 12 seconds. You can turn these lights off by turning theignition to the ON position. The interior lights will not turn offif you have turned them on manually or if a door is open.

[FV02550(ALL)05/94] NOTE: The illuminated entry system will only work whenthe dome light switch is in the “12” position.

*[FV02600(ALL)02/95] Locking the doors

*[FV02700(ALL)02/95] To lock all the doors, press the LOCK button.

*[FV02800(ALL)01/95] If you would like a signal that the doors are being locked, pressthe LOCK button again within five seconds. The doors will lockagain, the horn will beep and the low beam headlamps and taillamps will flash.

%*[FV02900(ALL)02/95] Activating the remote personal alarm

[FV03000(ALL)04/94] If you wish to activate the remote personal alarm, press thePANIC button. This will honk the horn and flash the low beamheadlamps and tail lamps for approximately two minutesforty-five seconds. You can turn it off by pressing the PANICbutton again on the same transmitter or by turning the ignitionkey to the ON position.

%*[FV03100(ALL)02/95] Replacing the batteries

*[FV03200(ALL)02/95] The remote entry transmitter is powered by two coin typethree-volt lithium 2016 batteries (included) that should last forseveral years of normal use. If you notice a significant decreasein operating range, the batteries should be replaced.Replacement batteries can be purchased at most pharmacies,watch stores or at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

Features

95

*[FV03300(ALL)11/93] NOTE: The operating range of the remote entry system canalso be affected by weather conditions (such as verycold temperatures) or structures around the vehicle(buildings, other vehicles, radio towers, etc.). Typicaloperating range will allow you to be up to 33 feet (10meters) away from your vehicle.

[FV03400(ALL)05/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0001315-A

Replacing the batteries

*[FV03500(ALL)02/95] The transmitter can be snapped apart to replace the batteries bytwisting a thin coin between the two halves of the transmitter.DO NOT TAKE THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTERAPART. When installing the new batteries, be sure to place thepositive (+) side down as marked. Snap the two halves backtogether.

%*[FV03600(ALL)02/95] Replacement/additional transmitters

*[FV03700(ALL)02/95] In the event a transmitter is lost, return the remainingtransmitters to your dealer for reprogramming of your remoteentry system. This is necessary to prevent further unauthorizeduse of the lost transmitter.

*[FV03800(ALL)02/95] Additional transmitters may be purchased from your dealer(remote entry system will work with up to four transmitters).Return your existing transmitters to your dealer so the remoteentry system can be reprogrammed with your new and existingtransmitters.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

96

*[FV03900(ALL)02/95] THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCCRULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWINGTWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSEHARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUSTACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDINGINTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIREDOPERATION.

*[FV07800(ALL)02/95] Windows

*[FV08200(ALL)02/94] Power Windows (If equipped)

*[FV08300(ALL)02/95] Each door has a power control that opens and closes thewindow on that door. The driver’s door has a master controlpanel that operates all four windows.

[FV08400(ALL)04/94] In order to use your power window controls, the ignition switchmust be in the ON position.

[FV08450(ALL)05/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001191-BThe master controls on the driver’s door

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

Features

97

*[FV08500(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not let children play with the power windows. Theymay seriously hurt themselves. Make sure occupants areclear of the window(s) before closing.

[FV08600(ALL)01/95] One-touch-down window

[FV08700(ALL)11/93] The one-touch-down feature allows you to completely open thedriver’s window by briefly pressing and releasing the bottom ofthe window switch. To stop the window before it openscompletely, press the switch again.

[FV08800(ALL)11/93] The one-touch feature only opens the window. To close thewindow, you must press and hold the top of the switch.

[FV09000(ALL)01/95] Rear window lockout

[FV09100(ALL)11/93] To lock out the rear window switches with the master controls,slide the lockout switch to the left. To restore individual control,slide the switch to the right.

*[FV09200(ALL)02/95] Moon Roof (If equipped)

*[FV09300(ALL)03/95] You can move the moon roof back to open the glass panel, oryou can tilt it up to ventilate the vehicle.

[FV09350(ALL)01/95] The rocker type switch is used to open and close the moon roof.You must press and hold the switch until the desired position isreached. At open and closed positions, the motor willautomatically turn off. Release the switch at this time to avoidmotor damage.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

98

[FV09400(ALL)11/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001187-AThe map lamps and the switch for the moon roof

[FV09500(ALL)01/95] To open the moon roof, press and hold the rear portion of theswitch. The glass panel will move to the open position and stop.

[FV09600(ALL)01/95] To close the moon roof, press and hold the front portion of theswitch. The glass panel will move to the closed position andstop.

*[FV09700(ALL)01/95] To tilt the moon roof into vent position when the glass panel isclosed, press the front portion of the switch.

*[FV09800(ALL)04/95] To close from vent position, press and hold the rear portion ofthe switch.

*[FV09900(ALL)01/95] Occasionally wiping the outside guide rail covers of the moonroof with a clean cloth will help keep the moon roof workingproperly.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

Features

99

[FV10100(ALL)11/93]

7-1/2 pica art:0001188-A

The moon roof

*[FV10150(ALL)01/95] RWARNING

Do not let children play with the moon roof. They mayseriously hurt themselves.

*[FV10200(ALL)01/95] Sliding Shade

*[FV10300(ALL)01/95] The moon roof has a sliding shade that you can manually openor close to block the sun when the glass panel is shut.

[FV10400(ALL)05/95] To close the sliding shade, pull the shade toward the front ofthe vehicle. The shade automatically opens when the moon roofis opened.

*[FV10500(ALL)01/95] Seats

*[FV10525(ALL)04/95] Head Restraints

*[FV10600(ALL)04/95] If you use them properly, head restraints will help protect yourhead and neck in a collision.

*[FV10700(ALL)05/95] A head restraint helps protect you best if you position it behindyour head and not behind your neck.

[FV10750(ALL)05/95] If your vehicle has the four-way head restraint, you can adjust itin four directions. You can raise it two (2) inches (50 mm) fromits normal position, or you can move it forward up to 60˚ untilyou reach the desired position.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

100

[FV10800(ALL)11/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001216-AThe four-way head restraint

%*[FV11000(ALL)05/95] Manual Seats

[FV11200(ALL)02/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001217-BManual seat adjustment

*[FV11500(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when thevehicle is moving.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

Features

101

*[FV11600(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, alwaysdrive and ride with your seatback upright and the lapbelt snug and low across the hips.

*[FV11700(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoidinjuring people in a collision or sudden stop.

[FV11801(ALL)02/94] Manual lumbar support (If equipped)

[FV11901(ALL)02/94] The handwheel on the side of the seatback inflates and deflatesthe lumbar support pads. To inflate the pads, turn the wheelcounter-clockwise. To deflate the pads, turn the wheel clockwise.

[FV12001(ALL)02/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001261-AManual lumbar support adjustment

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

102

%*[FV12400(ALL)02/95] Power Seats (If equipped)

[FV12500(ALL)05/94] If your vehicle has power seats, you can raise or lower thewhole front seat, move the seat forward or backward and tiltthe front or back of the seat up or down.

[FV12650(ALL)05/94]

13-1/2 pica

art:0001297-B The seat base controls on the driver’s seat

[FV12700(ALL)11/93] To move the seat forward or back, slide the seat base controlbutton forward or back. To raise or lower the height of the seatbase, slide the button up or down. To raise or lower the front ofthe seat base, slide the front of the button up or down. To raiseor lower the rear of the seat base, slide the back of the buttonup or down.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

Features

103

[FV12750( Z)05/94] Power seatback

[FV12770(ALL)01/95]

13-1/2 pica art:0000462-E

The seatback controls on the driver’s seat

[FV12800(ALL)05/94] To tilt the seatback forward or back, slide the top part of thetop button forward or back. To inflate or deflate the lumbarsupport pads, slide the bottom of the button forward or back.

[FV12900(ALL)11/93] Folding Rear Seats (If equipped)

[FV13000(ALL)05/94] The release knobs for the split rear folding seatbacks are in thetrunk. Pull the knob to fold down the seat.

[FV13100(ALL)11/93] To raise the rear seatback, push the seatback upward until itlocks in place. Make sure it is firmly latched by pushingforward and back on it.

*[FV13200(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Securely latch the seatback in the upright position toprevent the seatback or objects from being thrownforward during a sudden stop or collision.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

104

[FV13300(ALL)05/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001248-BFolding rear seatback release knob

[FV13310(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Seats

*[FV13320(ALL)05/95] Leather

*[FV13340(ALL)05/95] For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth.For more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a leather andvinyl cleaner or a mild soap.

%*[FV13350(ALL)04/95] Fabric

*[FV13370(ALL)05/95] Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuumcleaner. Remove fresh spots immediately. Follow the directionsthat come with the cleaner.

*[FV13380(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on a small, hiddenarea of fabric. If the fabric’s color or texture isadversely affected by a particular cleaner, do not useit.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

Features

105

*[FV14000(ALL)01/95] Mirrors

*[FV14600(ALL)01/93] Side View Mirrors

[FV14700(ALL)04/94] The standard side view mirrors are manually adjusted by usingthe remote knobs. The knob on each door adjusts the mirror onthat side of the vehicle. Move the control knob in the directionyou want to move the mirror.

[FV14800(ALL)02/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0000463-BThe left side mirror control (right side similar)

[FV14850(ALL)05/94] Dual electric remote control mirrors (if equipped)

[FV14900(ALL)05/94] The control for adjusting the electric side view mirrors is on theinstrument panel, to the left of the steering wheel.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

106

[FV15100(ALL)02/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001182-BElectric remote control mirror knob

[FV15160(ALL)05/94] Turn the knob back to the middle position to keep the mirror inplace.

[FV15170(ALL)02/94] The side view mirror on the right is a convex mirror. Thismirror gives you a wider view of the lanes on your right andbehind you.

*[FV15180(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The side view mirror on the right makes objects appearsmaller and farther away than they actually are.

%*[FV15200(ALL)01/95] Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harshabrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.

[FV15300(ALL)02/94] Heated mirror feature (If equipped)

*[FV15400(ALL)03/95] Both mirrors are heated whenever the Electric Rear WindowDefroster is turned on. Do not remove ice from the mirrors witha scraper or you could damage them. If the outside mirror glassis frozen in place, do not attempt to readjust or move themirror glass or damage may result.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

Features

107

%*[FV15500(ALL)05/95] Sun Visors

*[FV15600(ALL)04/95] Illuminated Visor Mirror (If equipped)

[FV15700(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle may have lighted mirrors on the sun visors. Themirror is lit by sliding open the mirror cover.

[FV15800(ALL)11/93]

10-1/2 pica

art:0000588-BThe visor mirror

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

108

*[FV15900(ALL)01/95] Console

*[FV16000(ALL)01/95] Your vehicle may have a full console. The full console has thefollowing features:

[FV16100(ALL)01/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0001175-CThe features on the full console

[FV16200(ALL)05/94] Cupholder with Full Console

[FV16300(ALL)05/94] To raise the pop-up cup holder, push and release the cupholderdoor, then unfold the holder.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

Features

109

*[FV17000(ALL)01/95] Storage Compartments[FV17100(ALL)01/95] Your vehicle may have several storage compartments:

[FV17201(ALL)01/95] ■ two map pockets on the panels of the front doors. The backof the front seats may also have map pockets.

[FV17301(ALL)01/95] ■ a coin holder on the instrument panel

[FV17401( Z)01/95] ■ a stowage compartment on the lower left side of theinstrument panel

[FV17501(ALL)01/95] ■ a small storage pocket on the outside of the front seat base

*[FV17800(ALL)01/95] Trunk[FV17900(ALL)11/93] To open the trunk manually, use the oval key.

[FV18000(ALL)01/95] Remote Trunk Release (If equipped)

[FV18100(ALL)05/94] The remote trunk release is on the floor to the left of thedriver’s seat.

[FV18200(ALL)05/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0000984-E

The remote trunk release

[FV18300(ALL)05/94] You can disable the remote trunk release. If you depress thelever on the trunk latch that is marked in orange before closingthe trunk, the trunk can only be opened with the key.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

110

[FV18400(ALL)05/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001485-ADisabling the remote trunk release

[FV18800(ALL)04/95] Remote Fuel Filler Door Release(If equipped)

[FV18900(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle has a remote control fuel filler door which cannotbe opened from the outside. To unlatch the fuel filler door,firmly push down the front of the release handle, which is onthe floor to the left of the driver’s seat. Refer to Servicing YourVehicle in the Index for further information.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

Features

111

*[FV19000(ALL)01/93] Floor Mats[FV19100(ALL)01/95] Positive retention floor mat (If equipped)

(Standard in Canada)

*[FV19200(ALL)01/95] Position the floor mat in the footwell. Place the mat eyelet overthe pointed end of the retention post from the rear and rotateforward to install. Adjust the floor mat position to allow properoperation of accelerator pedal, brake pedal and clutch pedal.

[FV19300(ALL)01/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0001344-AThe positive retention floor mat

[FV19400(ALL)01/95] To remove, lift the floor mat just forward of the retention postand rotate it rearward to disengage it from the retention post.

File:cdfvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:06:10 1996

113

Electronic

Sound

System

s

[AS

01100(A

LL)04/9

4]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

60

65

7-A

Com

pactD

iscR

adio

File:cdasz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

114

%*[AS01125(ALL)05/95] Compact Disc Radio

*[AS01150(ALL)05/95] The Compact Disc Radio combines the Electronic Stereo Radiowith the Ford Compact Disc Player.

*[AS01200(ALL)04/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio/CD Player

*[AS01300(ALL)04/95] Most of the features of this unit work for both radio and CDoperation. Also, some of the knobs and buttons control severaldifferent functions, so be sure to read all of the operatinginstructions carefully.

*[AS01400(ALL)04/95] How to turn the radio on and off

*[AS01500(ALL)04/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on. Press it againto turn it off.

*[AS01600(ALL)04/95] How to adjust the volume

*[AS01700(ALL)05/95] Press the (+/–) side of the “VOL” button to increase/decreasethe volume. Bars illuminate in the display to show the relativevolume level.

*[AS01800(ALL)04/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a certain listeninglevel when the ignition switch is turned off, when theignition switch is turned back on, the volume willcome back to a “nominal” listening level. However, ifthe radio power is turned off (with the “POWER”button), the volume will remain in the position it wasset at when radio power is switched back on.

*[AS01900(ALL)04/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS02000(ALL)04/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band.When in the radio mode, pushing the button more than oncewill alternate between AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions areused with the station memory buttons described under How totune radio stations.

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

Electronic Sound Systems

115

%*[AS02100(ALL)05/95] How to tune radio stations

*[AS02200(ALL)04/95] There are four ways for you to tune in a particular station. Youcan manually locate the station using the “SCAN/TUNE”button, “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or select thestation by using the memory buttons, which you can set to anydesired frequency. These four methods are described below.

*[AS02300(ALL)04/95] ■ Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to manually tune

*[AS02400(ALL)04/95] You can change the frequency up or down one increment ata time (FM changes in increments of 200kHz; AM changes inincrements of 10kHz) by first pressing the “SCAN/TUNE”button twice (display shows “TUNE”), then — withinapproximately five seconds — pressing and releasing eitherthe top a or bottom b half of the “SEEK” button. Tochange frequencies quickly, press and hold down either thetop or bottom half of the “SEEK” button. While you aremanually tuning, the display will show a blinking “M”.

*[AS02500(ALL)04/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcastfrequency, whether or not a station is present on thatfrequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.)

*[AS02600(ALL)04/95] ■ Using the “SEEK” function

*[AS02700(ALL)04/95] This feature on your radio allows you to automatically selectlistenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press thetop a half of the “SEEK” button to select the next listenablestation up the frequency band. Press the bottom b half ofthe button to select the next listenable station down thefrequency band. By pressing and holding the button,listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desiredstation.

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

116

*[AS02800(ALL)04/95] ■ Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to scan radio stations

*[AS02900(ALL)04/95] Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button once enters the scanmode (display will indicate “SCN”). Pushing the top a halfof the “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode up thefrequency band, stopping on each listenable station forapproximately five seconds. Pushing the bottom b half ofthe “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode down thefrequency band, again stopping on each listenable station forapproximately five seconds.

*[AS03000(ALL)04/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled stationpress the “SCAN/TUNE” button again.

*[AS03200(ALL)04/95] ■ Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons

*[AS03300(ALL)02/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 station memory buttons.These buttons can be used to select up to 6 preset AMstations and 12 FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).

*[AS03400(ALL)04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

*[AS03600(ALL)04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold the button untilthe sound returns. That station is now held in memory onthat button.

*[AS03700(ALL)04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory presetbutton you want to set.

*[AS03850(ALL)04/95] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the clock andstation memory preset buttons (if programmed in automode) will need to be reset.

[AS04150(ALL)02/95] ■ Using the Automatic Memory Store feature

*[AS04250(ALL)05/95] With Auto Memory Store, you can continually set strongstations into your memory buttons without losing yourexisting memory presets, which is especially handy whiletraveling. Your radio will automatically set your memorybuttons to the strong local stations so you don’t have tocontinually manually tune to existing stations.

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

Electronic Sound Systems

117

*[AS04350(ALL)02/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the “AUTOPRESET” button once. Your radio will set the first fivestrong stations of the band you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2)into the memory buttons. The display will show “AUTO”,then run through the frequencies, stopping momentarily onthe stations being set into the memory buttons. The radio isnow in the “AUTO” mode and this display will show“AUTO” each time a preset is activated.

*[AS04450(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than five strong stations in thefrequency band, the remaining unfilled buttons willstore the last strong station detected on the band.

*[AS04550(ALL)05/95] After all stations have been filled, the radio will beginplaying the station stored on memory button 1.

*[AS04560(ALL)04/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and return tothe manually-set memory button stations (or those stationsset using Auto Memory Load), simply push the “AUTOPRESET” button. Display will show “AUTO” then “OFF”.The next time Auto Memory Store is activated on that band,the radio will store the next set of five strong stations.

*[AS04600(ALL)02/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speaker output of yourradio

*[AS04700(ALL)04/95] ■ Increasing or decreasing bass response

[AS04750(ALL)07/94] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads“BASS”. Push the top (+) of the “VOLUME” button toincrease bass (more “lows”), and push the button (s) todecrease bass (less “lows”).

*[AS04800(ALL)04/95] ■ Increasing or decreasing treble response

[AS04900(ALL)07/94] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads“TREB”. Push the top (+) of the “VOLUME” button toincrease treble (more “highs”), and push the bottom (s) todecrease treble (less “highs”).

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

118

*[AS04950(ALL)04/95] ■ Adjusting speaker balance

[AS05000(ALL)07/94] Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distributionbetween the right and left speakers. Push the “AUDIO”button repeatedly until the display button reads “BAL”. Pushthe top (+) of the “VOLUME” button to shift the sound tothe right speakers, and push the bottom (s) to shift thesound to the left speakers.

*[AS05100(ALL)04/95] ■ Adjusting speaker fader

[AS05200(ALL)07/94] Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distributionbetween the front and rear speakers. Push the “AUDIO”button repeatedly until the display reads “FADE”. Push thetop (+) of the “VOLUME” button to shift the sound to thefront speakers, and push the bottom (s) to shift the soundto the rear speakers.

*[AS05300(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show relative levels ofbass and treble, and positions of speaker balance andfader functions (left to right, front to rear).

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

Electronic

Sound

System

s119

[AS

06100(A

LL)03/9

5]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

60

65

5-A

FordC

ompact

Disc

Player

File:cdasz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

120

*[AS06150(ALL)05/95] Ford Compact Disc Player

*[AS06200(ALL)03/95] The Ford Compact Disc Player operates when the Audio Systemis on and a disc is inserted (label side up). Handle the disc byits edge only. (Be sure to read and follow all of the care andcleaning instructions under How To Take Care of and Clean YourCD Player and Discs in this section.)

*[AS06300(ALL)03/95] The digital display on your CD player shows the track(selection) number and the elapsed time. Indicators for play a,stop X, compression on (“COMP”) and shuffle on (“SHUF”) arealso in the display. (These features are described later.)

*[AS07300(ALL)04/95] Once a disc is inserted, operation of the CD player will overridethat of the radio.

*[AS07400(ALL)04/95] NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance and fader controlson the radio are also used with the CD player. Referto earlier operating instructions on these controls.

*[AS07500(ALL)04/95] How to insert a disc and begin play

*[AS07550(ALL)04/95] Insert one disc, label side up into the disc opening. Wheninserted, the disc automatically loads into the unit and playstarts at the beginning of the first track (selection).

*[AS07600(ALL)04/95] When the disc reaches the end, the disc player automaticallyreturns to the beginning of the disc and resumes playing.

*[AS07650(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Once a disc is inserted, the disc opening is secured toprevent the accidental insertion of a second disc.

*[AS07700(ALL)04/95] NOTE: The CD player has heat protection circuitry to protectthe laser diode. If the temperature of the playerreaches 167˚F (75˚C), the heat detection circuit willshut off the player and “TOO HOT” will scroll in thedisplay for approximately five seconds (radio willresume playing). When the temperature returns tonormal operating range, the CD player will again beoperational.

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

Electronic Sound Systems

121

*[AS07750(ALL)04/95] How to stop and restart the CD player

*[AS07800(ALL)04/95] When a disc is loaded, the unit automatically enters the playmode and the play indicator a illuminates. To stoptemporarily, press the “PLAY/STOP” button or the “AM/FM”button. The stop indicator X in the display illuminates andoperation returns to the radio mode. To resume CD play, pressthe “PLAY/STOP” button once again.

*[AS07850(ALL)04/95] NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFF during play andthen is set to the ON or ACCESSORY position, theCD player will resume playing in the mode it was inwhen ignition was turned off.

*[AS07860(ALL)03/95] How to locate a selection on your CD player usingAutomatic Music Search (AMS)

*[AS07880(ALL)03/95] An “AMS” (Automatic Music Search) control on your CD playerallows you to quickly find a particular selection on the disc.Press the left f side of the “AMS” control to locate aprevious selection or the right e side of the “AMS” controlto locate a later selection.

*[AS07900(ALL)05/95] How to fast forward or reverse your CD player

[AS07950(ALL)05/95] To quickly search for a particular point in a selection, press theright e button (to fast forward) or the left f button(to reverse). While either button is pressed, the disc goesforward or backward at two different speeds depending on howlong the button is held down. (Pressing either button for morethan approximately three seconds will speed up the process.)Release the button at the desired point (found by watching theelapsed playing time in the display or listening to the soundduring fast forward or reverse).

*[AS08000(ALL)03/95] When you have reached the end of the disc by keeping the fastforward e side of the button pressed, the display will showthe end time of the last track and the sound will be muted.When the fast forward e side of the button is released, theplayer resumes play at the beginning of the first track.

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

122

*[AS08010(ALL)03/95] A “1” and “0:00” will appear in the display when the beginningof the disc is reached by pressing the rewind f side of thebutton.

*[AS08020(ALL)04/95] Using the “SCAN” function

*[AS08030(ALL)03/95] Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan mode. The CDplayer will begin scanning the disc, stopping on each listenabletrack for approximately eight seconds. This continues until youpress the “SCAN” button a second time or eject the disc. Whilein the scan mode, the display flashes “SCAN.”

*[AS08040(ALL)04/95] Special features of your CD player

*[AS08050(ALL)04/95] ■ Compression

*[AS08060(ALL)04/95] The compression feature will bring soft and loud passagescloser together for a more consistent listening level.

*[AS08070(ALL)03/95] To turn the compression on, press the “COMPRESS” button.When on, the compression indicator (“COMP”) will appearin the display. Press the button again to turn off.

*[AS08072(ALL)03/95] ■ Shuffle

*[AS08074(ALL)03/95] The shuffle feature on your CD player allows you to listento your disc selections in a different order. When this featureis activated, your CD player will randomly select and playtracks on the disc.

*[AS08076(ALL)03/95] Press the “SHUFFLE” button to turn on, press it again toturn off. When on, the shuffle indicator (“SHUF”) willappear in the display. When the player is between selections,the display will show a moving dash (“-”) around theperimeter of the display.

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

Electronic Sound Systems

123

*[AS08077(ALL)03/95] ■ Shuffle and Scan

*[AS08078(ALL)03/95] Both the shuffle and scan features can be activatedsimultaneously. In this mode, the player will randomly picka selection and play the first eight seconds. This process iscontinued until either the “SCAN” button or “SHUFFLE”button is pressed a second time.

*[AS08080(ALL)04/95] ■ Automatic Disc Storage

*[AS08090(ALL)04/95] If the disc is ejected from the CD player but is not removedfrom the disc opening within approximately 10 seconds, theplayer will automatically reload the disc for storage, unlessthe disc is automatically ejected due to a “focus error” (discinserted upside down). In this case, the disc will not beautomatically reloaded.

*[AS08095(ALL)04/95] How to eject the disc

*[AS08096(ALL)03/95] Push the “EJECT” button in the upper left corner of your CDplayer to stop play, eject the disc and resume radio or tapeoperation of your audio system.

%*[AS08200(ALL)04/95] How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD Player andDiscs

*[AS08300(ALL)04/95] To ensure the continued performance of your Ford CompactDisc Player, carefully read the following precautions:

*[AS08400(ALL)04/95] ■ Always handle the disc by its edge. Never touch the playingsurface.

*[AS08500(ALL)04/95] ■ Before playing, inspect the disc for any contamination. Ifneeded, clean the disc with an approved disc cleaner, such asthe DiscwasherH Compact Disc Cleaner or the Allsop 3HCompact Disc Cleaner, by wiping from the center out to theedges. Do not use a circular motion to clean.

*[AS08600(ALL)04/95] ■ Do not clean discs with solvents such as benzine, thinner,commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray intendedfor analog records.

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

124

*[AS08700(ALL)04/95] ■ Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat sourcessuch as defroster and floor heating ducts. Do not leave anydiscs in a parked car in direct sunlight where there may be aconsiderable rise in temperature or damage may result.

*[AS08800(ALL)04/95] ■ After playing, store the disc in its case.

*[AS08900(ALL)04/95] ■ If a disc has already been inserted, do not try to insertanother disc. Doing so may damage the disc player.

*[AS09000(ALL)04/95] ■ Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc player.

*[AS09100(ALL)04/95] CAUTION: The use of optical instruments with this productwill increase eye hazard as the laser beam used in this compactdisc player is harmful to the eyes. Do not attempt todisassemble the case. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.

*[AS09200(ALL)04/95] Common Operating Conditions of Your CD Player

*[AS09300(ALL)04/95] The following information is designed to help you recognizetypical situations that could be mistakenly interpreted asmechanical malfunctions of the disc player.

*[AS09400(ALL)04/95] ■ A disc is already loaded.

*[AS09500(ALL)04/95] ■ The disc is inserted with the label surface downward.

*[AS09600(ALL)04/95] ■ The disc is dusty or defective.

*[AS09700(ALL)05/95] ■ The player’s internal temperature is above 167˚F (75˚C).Allow the player to cool off before operating.

*[AS09800(ALL)04/95] ■ Different manufacturers of compact discs may produce discswith different dimensions or tolerances, some of which maynot be within industry standards or in accordance with theCD format. Because of this, a new disc that is free of dustand scratches could be defective and may not play on yourFord Compact Disc Player.

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

Electronic Sound Systems

125

*[AS09900(ALL)04/95] If play does not begin after the CD button is pushed:

*[AS10000(ALL)04/95] ■ The radio is not on.

*[AS10100(ALL)04/95] ■ The unit is in the stop mode.

*[AS10200(ALL)06/95] ■ Moisture may have condensed on the lenses within the unit.If this occurs, remove the disc and wait approximately anhour until the moisture evaporates.

*[AS10300(ALL)04/95] If the sound skips:

*[AS10400(ALL)04/95] ■ Badly scratched discs or extremely rough roads will causethe sound to skip. Skipping will not damage the disc playeror scratch the discs.

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

126

[AS

21825(A

LL)04/9

4]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

60

65

3-A

Electronic

StereoR

adio

File:cdasz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

Electronic

Sound

System

s127

[AS

21925(A

LL)04/9

4]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

60

65

4-A

Electronic

StereoR

adiow

ithC

assette

File:cdasz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

128

*[AS21926(ALL)05/95] Electronic Stereo and Stereo CassetteRadios

[AS21927(ALL)03/94] Both the Electronic Stereo Radio and Cassette Radio offer fullelectronic tuning with new soft touch controls.

*[AS21928(ALL)02/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS21929(ALL)02/95] How to turn the radio on and adjust the volume

*[AS21930(ALL)04/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on. Press it againto turn it off.

*[AS21950(ALL)05/95] Press the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to increase thevolume. Press the left (s) side of the button to decrease thevolume. Illuminated bars in the display show the relativevolume level.

*[AS21975(ALL)04/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a certain listeninglevel when the ignition switch is turned off, when theignition switch is turned back on, the volume willcome back to a “nominal” listening level. However, ifthe radio power is turned off (with the “POWER”button), the volume will remain in the position it wasset at when radio power is switched back on.

*[AS22100(ALL)04/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS22225(ALL)02/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band.Pushing the button more than once will alternate between AM,FM1 and FM2. These functions are used with the stationmemory buttons described under How to tune radio stations.

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

Electronic Sound Systems

129

*[AS22300(ALL)05/95] How to tune radio stations (Stereo Radio)

*[AS22500(ALL)05/95] ■ Using the “TUNE” function

[AS22600(ALL)05/95] You can change the frequency up or down one increment ata time by pressing and releasing either the right (+) or left(s) side of the “TUNE” button. To change frequenciesquickly, press and hold down either the right or left side ofthe “TUNE” button.

*[AS22700(ALL)02/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcastfrequency, whether or not a station is present on thatfrequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.)

*[AS22704(ALL)04/95] ■ Using the “SEEK” function

*[AS22708(ALL)04/95] This feature on your radio allows you to automatically selectlistenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press theright a side of the “SEEK” button to select the nextlistenable station up the frequency band. Press the left bside of the button to select the next listenable station downthe frequency band. By holding the button down, listenablestations can be passed over to reach the desired station.

%*[AS22710(ALL)05/95] How to tune radio stations (Stereo Cassette Radio)

*[AS22730(ALL)05/95] ■ Using the “AMS” function to manually tune your radio(Stereo Cassette Radio)

*[AS22740(ALL)02/95] You can change the frequency up or down one increment ata time by first pressing the “AMS” button (display shows“TUNE”) then within approximately five seconds pressingand releasing either the right a or left b side of the“SEEK” button. To change frequencies quickly, press andhold down either the right or left side of the “SEEK” button.

*[AS22750(ALL)04/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcastfrequency, whether or not a station is present on thatfrequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.)

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

130

*[AS22800(ALL)04/95] ■ Using the “SEEK” function

*[AS22900(ALL)04/95] This feature on your radio allows you to automatically selectlistenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press theright a side of the “SEEK” button to select the nextlistenable station up the frequency band. Press the left bside of the button to select the next listenable station downthe frequency band. By holding the button down, listenablestations can be passed over to reach the desired station.

*[AS23160(ALL)02/95] ■ Using the “SCAN” function (Stereo Cassette Radio)

*[AS23170(ALL)07/94] Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan mode. The radiowill begin scanning up the frequency band, stopping on eachlistenable station for approximately a five-second sampling.This continues until you press the “SCAN” button a secondtime. The display flashes “AM” or “FM.”

*[AS23200(ALL)04/95] ■ Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons

*[AS23325(ALL)02/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 station memory buttons.These buttons can be used to select up to 6 preset AMstations and 12 FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).

*[AS23400(ALL)02/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons to the desiredfrequencies:

*[AS23525(ALL)04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

*[AS23700(ALL)04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold the button untilthe sound returns. That station is now held in memory onthat button.

*[AS23800(ALL)04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory presetbutton you want to set.

*[AS23900(ALL)04/95] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the clock andstation memory preset buttons (if programmed in automode) will need to be reset.

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

Electronic Sound Systems

131

*[AS24000(ALL)02/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speaker output of yourradio

*[AS24100(ALL)04/95] ■ Increasing or decreasing bass response

*[AS24225(ALL)05/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads“BASS.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button toincrease bass (more “lows”), and push the left (s) side todecrease bass (less “lows”).

*[AS24300(ALL)04/95] ■ Increasing or decreasing treble response

*[AS24425(ALL)05/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads“TREB.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button toincrease the treble (more “highs”), and push the left (s) sideto decrease treble (less “highs”).

*[AS24600(ALL)04/95] ■ Adjusting speaker balance

*[AS24725(ALL)05/95] Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distributionbetween the right and left speakers. Push the “AUDIO”button repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.” Push theright (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to shift the sound tothe right speakers, and push the left (s) side to shift thesound to the left speakers.

*[AS24800(ALL)04/95] ■ Adjusting speaker fader

*[AS24925(ALL)05/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distributionbetween the front and rear speakers. Push the “AUDIO”button repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.” Push theright (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to shift the sound tothe front speakers, and push the left (s) side to shift thesound to the rear speakers.

*[AS24950(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show relative levels ofbass and treble, and positions of speaker balance andfader functions (left to right, front to rear).

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

132

%*[AS25000(ALL)02/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape Player

*[AS25400(ALL)02/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the cassette tapeplayer.

*[AS25500(ALL)02/95] How to insert a tape

*[AS25600(ALL)05/95] Insert a cassette (with the open edge to the right) firmly into thetape door opening, making sure the cassette is completely inand “seated.”

*[AS25700(ALL)02/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape

*[AS25800(ALL)02/95] NOTE: The tape track number indicated in the display doesnot necessarily correspond to the tape track or sidenumber on the cassette label. It is used only toindicate when the tape mechanism reverses tracks.

*[AS25920(ALL)02/95] ■ Using the Automatic Music Search (“AMS”)

*[AS25930(ALL)03/95] Press and hold the “AMS” button (“AMS” will appear in thedisplay). Then, push the left h button to rewind to thebeginning of the current selection or press the right gbutton to fast forward to the beginning of the next selection.

*[AS25950(ALL)02/95] ■ Fast forwarding the tape

*[AS26000(ALL)03/95] Push the right g button to fast forward the tape.

*[AS26100(ALL)02/95] ■ Rewinding the tape

*[AS26200(ALL)03/95] Push the left h button to rewind the tape.

*[AS26900(ALL)02/95] ■ How to change the side of the tape being played

*[AS27000(ALL)03/95] The alternate track (other side) of the tape can be selected atany time by pushing both fast-wind buttons h and gat the same time.

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

Electronic Sound Systems

133

*[AS27100(ALL)02/95] How to eject the tape

*[AS27250(ALL)02/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the “EJECT”button. The radio will resume playing.

*[AS27300(ALL)02/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature

*[AS27400(ALL)02/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured under licensefrom Dolby Labs Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” anddouble-D symbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories Licensing Corporation.

*[AS27550(ALL)05/95] Push station memory button 3 to activate DolbyH B NoiseReduction.

*[AS27600(ALL)02/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and Tapes

*[AS27700(ALL)02/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player performing the way itwas meant to, read and follow these simple precautions:

*[AS27750(ALL)02/95] ■ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to clean the tapeplayer head after 10-12 hours of play will help maintain thebest playback sound and proper tape operation.

*[AS27800(ALL)02/95] ■ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less should beused. Tapes longer than 90 minutes are thinner and subjectto breakage or may jam the tape player mechanism.

*[AS27900(ALL)02/95] ■ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct sunlight, highhumidity and extreme heat or cold. If they are exposed toextreme conditions, allow them to reach a moderatetemperature before playing.

*[AS28001(ALL)02/95] ■ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it before playingby putting your finger or a pencil into one of the holes andturning the hub until the tape is tight.

*[AS28101(ALL)02/95] ■ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become lodged in themechanism. Remove any loose label material before insertinga cassette.

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

134

*[AS28200(ALL)03/95] ■ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape player when not inuse. High heat in the vehicle can cause the cassette to warp.

*[AS35200(ALL)06/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions

*[AS35300(ALL)02/95] Several conditions prevent FM reception from being completelyclear and noise-free, such as the following:

*[AS35400(ALL)04/95] 1. Distance/Strength

*[AS35500(ALL)02/95] The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distancethe signal must travel. The listenable range of an average FMsignal is approximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyond thisdistance, the radio is operating in a fringe area and the signalbecomes weaker.

*[AS35600(ALL)04/95] 2. Terrain

*[AS35700(ALL)02/95] The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) of the area overwhich the signal travels may prevent the FM signal from beingnoise-free.

*[AS36850(ALL)04/95] 3. Rounded off frequencies

*[AS36900(ALL)02/95] Some FM radio stations advertise a “rounded-off” frequencywhich is not the frequency they actually broadcast on. Forexample, a radio station that is assigned a frequency of 98.7MHz may call itself “Radio 99” even though 99.0 MHz is not anallowable FM broadcast frequency.

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

Electronic Sound Systems

135

*[AS37000(ALL)01/95] Important Warranty and Service Information

*[AS37050(ALL)07/90] ■ Warranty

*[AS37100(ALL)03/95] Your sound system is warranted for three years or 36,000 miles(60,000 kilometers), whichever comes first. Consult your vehiclewarranty booklet for further information. Ask your dealer for acopy of this limited warranty.

*[AS37150(ALL)07/90] ■ Service

*[AS37200(ALL)01/95] At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audio systems with acomprehensive service and repair program. If anything shouldgo wrong with your Ford audio system, return to your dealerfor service. There is a nationwide network of qualified Fordauthorized repair centers to assist you.

File:cdasz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:59 1996

137

Driving Your Mystique

*[DR00200(ALL)09/93] Procedures for driving your vehicle will vary depending onwhich type of transaxle your vehicle has. You may be familiarwith the term “transmission.” We use transaxle because it is amore accurate term for vehicles that have front-wheel drive.

*[DR00300(ALL)11/94] Your vehicle will have one of the following types of transaxles:

[DR00410(ALL)02/94] ■ an automatic overdrive transaxle with transaxle controlswitch, or

*[DR00600(ALL)11/94] ■ a manual transaxle.

*[DR00700(ALL)11/94] If you are not sure which transaxle your vehicle has, talk toyour dealer.

*[DR00750(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with an Electronic Powertrain ControlModule that limits engine and/or vehicle speeds with a cut-outmode to promote durability.

*[DR00800(ALL)01/95] Driving with an Automatic OverdriveTransaxle

[DR00850(ALL)05/95] Your automatic overdrive transaxle provides fully automaticoperation in either D (Overdrive) or with the transaxle controlswitch depressed. Driving with the shift selector in D(Overdrive) gives the best fuel economy for normal drivingconditions. For manual control, start in 1 (First) and then shiftmanually.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

138

*[DR00900(ALL)01/95] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear

[DR00915(ALL)05/95] You must push in the thumb button to move the gearshift tothe position you choose.

*[DR00917(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshiftlever from position to position. If you do not hold thebrake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedlyand injure someone.

*[DR00918(ALL)03/95] To operate:

*[DR00919(ALL)01/95] 1. Start the engine.

*[DR00920(ALL)01/95] 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

*[DR00921(ALL)01/95] 3. Move the gearshift lever out of P (Park).

%*[DR00923(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a Brake Shift Interlock safetyfeature. This feature prevents the gearshift from being movedfrom the P (Park) position until the brake pedal is depressed.This feature is active when the ignition is in the ON position. Ifthe gearshift lever CANNOT be moved from P (Park) with thebrake pedal depressed:

*[DR00924(ALL)01/95] 1. Turn the engine off and remove the ignition key.

[DR00925(ALL)05/94] 2. With the parking brake applied and the brake pedaldepressed, insert a screwdriver about 2" (5 cm) into thesquare opening to the right of the gearshift at the base of theconsole.

[DR00926(ALL)05/94] 3. Rotate the screwdriver point rearward.

[DR00927(ALL)02/94] 4. Push and hold the thumb button and move the gearshift.

[DR00928(ALL)02/94] 5. Remove the screwdriver when the gearshift moves from theP (Park) position.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

Driving Your Mystique

139

[DR00929(ALL)01/95]

13-1/2 pica

art:0001264-C Overriding the brake shift interlock

*[DR00931(ALL)04/95] The console-mounted gearshift will lock when you turn the keyto the LOCK position. When the gearshift is in any positionexcept P (Park), the ignition key cannot be turned to LOCK orremoved from the steering column. TO REMOVE THE KEY, thegearshift lever must be in P (Park).

*[DR00935(ALL)11/94] Once the gearshift is secure in the desired position, release thebrake pedal and use the accelerator as necessary.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

140

[DR01100(ALL)05/94]

13-1/2 pica

art:0000492-D Console-mounted automatic transaxle shift control lever

%*[DR01600(ALL)01/95] R (Reverse)

*[DR01700(ALL)02/95] With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position, the vehicle willmove backward. You should always come to a complete stopbefore shifting into or out of R (Reverse).

*[DR01725(ALL)01/95] N (Neutral)

[DR01750(ALL)11/94] In N (Neutral), the wheels of the transaxle are not locked. Yourvehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline, unless theparking brake or brakes are on.

*[DR01800(ALL)01/95] Driving

[DR01825(ALL)02/94] Your vehicle’s gearshift is console-mounted on the floor. TheTransaxle Control Switch (TCS) is located on the gearshifthandle. The transaxle control indicator light (OD OFF) is locatedon the instrument panel. You can put the gearshift lever in anyof the several positions.

[DR01850(ALL)05/94] The OD OFF light is off (not illuminated) during normal vehicleoperation. This allows the transaxle to upshift and downshiftfrom first through fourth gears. When the TCS is pressed, the

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

Driving Your Mystique

141

transaxle control indicator light will illuminate (OD OFF) on theinstrument panel. When this OD OFF is illuminated thetransaxle will upshift and downshift from first through thirdgears and provide coast braking in second and third gears.

[DR01875(ALL)02/94] To return the transaxle to normal operation (first through fourthgears) depress the TCS again. This switch may be used to canceloverdrive any time the vehicle is being driven. Each time yourvehicle is started, the overdrive system will automatically be inthe normal overdrive mode and the light will not beilluminated.

[DR01900(ALL)05/95] When to use D (Overdrive — without Transaxle ControlSwitch Activated

[DR01925(ALL)05/94] D (Overdrive) is the usual driving position for an automaticoverdrive transaxle. It automatically upshifts or downshifts asthe vehicle speeds or slows.

[DR01950(ALL)05/94] However, D (Overdrive) also shifts into a fourth gear — anoverdrive gear — when your vehicle cruises at a consistentspeed for any length of time. This fourth gear will increase yourfuel economy when you travel at cruising speeds.

[DR02000(ALL)05/94] When to use D (Drive — with Transaxle Control Switchactivated)

[DR02025(ALL)05/94] D (Overdrive) may not be appropriate for certain terrain. If thetransaxle shifts back and forth between third and fourth gearswhile you are driving on hilly roads or if your vehicle requiresadditional power for climbing hills, depress the TCS. D (Drive)also gives more engine braking to slow your vehicle ondowngrades than D (Overdrive).

*[DR02100(ALL)01/95] When to use 2 (Second)

[DR02200(ALL)05/94] When your vehicle is in 2 (Second), it automatically starts off insecond gear. Use 2 (Second) to help drive up moderately steephills or restart from a standstill on slippery roads. It preventsthe transaxle from frequently shifting up and down. It also

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

142

gives more engine braking than D (Drive) (with TransaxleControl Switch activated) when going down hills.

[DR02300(ALL)05/95] Do not go faster than 55 mph (90 km/h) in this gear. You canupshift from 2 (Second) into D (Overdrive) at any speed.

*[DR02500(ALL)04/95] When to use 1 (First)

[DR02700(ALL)05/94] This position limits the transaxle to first gear. It helps brake thevehicle when going down hills where 2 (Second) is notsufficient.

[DR02800(ALL)05/95] Do not go faster than 38 mph (60 km/h) in this gear. You canupshift from 1 (First) to 2 (Second) or from 1 (First) toD (Overdrive) at any speed.

*[DR02900(ALL)01/95] P (Park)

*[DR03000(ALL)11/94] Always come to a complete stop before you shift into P (Park).Make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). Thislocks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from rotating.

*[DR03100(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Always set the parking brake fully and make sure thatthe gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).

*[DR03200(ALL)06/95] RWARNING

Never leave your vehicle unattended while it is running.

[DR03400(ALL)01/89] You can tell the gearshift is securely latched when the pushbutton has popped out. In this position the gear shift selectorlever cannot be moved unless the button is pushed in.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

Driving Your Mystique

143

*[DR06900(ALL)01/89] Driving with a Manual Transaxle

*[DR07000(ALL)03/95] Using the Clutch

*[DR07100(ALL)11/94] In order to start the vehicle, the clutch pedal must be fullydepressed to the floor. Before starting the engine, make sure thevehicle is in Neutral and the parking brake is set.

[DR07200(ALL)11/94] After the engine starts, allow it to idle for a few seconds. Then,hold your right foot on the brake pedal and release the parkingbrake. With the clutch pedal depressed to the floor with yourleft foot, move the gearshift into 1 (First) or R (Reverse).

[DR07300(ALL)11/94] To move the vehicle, take your right foot off the brake pedaland then slowly release the clutch pedal. (You may need topress down slowly on the accelerator at the same time that yourelease the clutch pedal.)

*[DR07400(ALL)03/95] Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and donot use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill whilewaiting on a hill. These actions will seriously reduce clutch life.

[DR07500(ALL)05/95] Idling the Vehicle

[DR07550(ALL)05/95] When the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running, DONOT rest your hand on or apply any pressure to gearshift leverwhen the clutch pedal is not depressed. This may result inerratic engine operation.

%*[DR07600(ALL)03/95] Shifting the Gears

*[DR07700(ALL)11/94] The gearshift for a manual transaxle is mounted on the floor.The gearshift can be in one of seven possible positions, asshown.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

144

[DR07810(ALL)02/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001265-AThe positions of the floor-mounted gearshift

[DR07900(ALL)11/94] Always push the clutch pedal all the way to the floor when youshift. You should upshift according to the speeds given in theshift speed chart.

*[DR08000(ALL)03/95] Backing up

*[DR08100(ALL)03/95] To shift into R (Reverse):

*[DR08201(ALL)11/94] 1. Completely stop your vehicle.

[DR08301(ALL)11/94] 2. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor and place the gearshiftlever in the Neutral position. Do not release the clutch pedal.

[DR08401(ALL)11/94] NOTE: If the following step is not followed, a grinding noisemay occur.

[DR08501(ALL)11/94] 3. Wait a minimum of three seconds before attempting to shiftinto R (Reverse) gear.

[DR08601(ALL)02/94] 4. Push the gearshift lever completely to the right, pull up thering on the stalk of the gearshift lever, and then pullrearward on the gearshift lever to engage the R (Reverse)gear.

[DR08701(ALL)11/94] 5. If the R (Reverse) gear is engaged, slowly release the clutchpedal from the floor.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

Driving Your Mystique

145

[DR08900(ALL)05/95] Upshifting

*[DR09000(ALL)03/95] Most of the time, you should upshift at the following speeds:

[DR09050(ALL)07/94]

twelve pica

chart:0001266-A

[DR09100(ALL)01/95]

twelve pica

chart:0001267-B

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

146

[DR09700(ALL)05/95] Downshifting

*[DR09800(ALL)03/95] When you slow down or climb a steep hill, always downshiftbefore the engine starts to lose power. Downshifting reduces thechance of stalling and gives your vehicle better acceleration toincrease speed again.

*[DR09900(ALL)03/95] When you drive down steep hills, downshifting helps you keepa safe speed and helps prevent unnecessary wear on the brakes.

*[DR10000(ALL)03/95] When you come to a stop, do not downshift through each gear.Disengage the clutch and use the brake as necessary.Downshifting through the gears decreases your vehicle’s fueleconomy.

[DR10201(ALL)05/95] Do not attempt to shift into 1 (First) gear with the clutch pedaldepressed at speeds higher than 20 mph (30 km/h). If you do,it could cause a complete clutch failure, making your vehicleinoperative.

[DR10301(ALL)01/95] Traction Control (If equipped)[DR10405(ALL)05/95] The traction control system prevents the wheels from spinning

on slippery roads.

[DR10505(ALL)05/95] Working with the anti-lock brake system, the traction controlsystem monitors the speed of the wheels as they roll over theroad surface. When a wheel starts to spin because of slipperyconditions, the traction control system slows the engine byclosing the throttle. At speeds below 35 mph (55 km/h) thetraction control system also applies the brake to the spinningwheel.

[DR10605(ALL)05/95] When the traction control system becomes active, the drivermay notice a very slight kick and then a hard resistance in theaccelerator pedal, and a mechanical noise. The traction controlsystem light on the instrument panel comes on or flashes onand off during activation.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

Driving Your Mystique

147

[DR10705(ALL)05/95] The traction control system can be turned off manually bypushing the T/C OFF button on the instrument panel to the leftof the steering wheel. The traction control system light willremain on as a reminder that the system is turned off.

[DR10805(ALL)05/94] Each time the vehicle is started, the traction control system willautomatically be on. When the ignition is turned to the ONposition, the traction control system light comes on forapproximately three (3) seconds.

[DR10905(ALL)05/95] If the light does not come on when the ignition is turned to theON position or if it does not come on when the T/C OFFbutton is pressed, have the system serviced by your dealer or aqualified service technician as soon as possible to restore thebenefits of the traction control feature. You do not need to havethe vehicle towed in.

*[DR15600(ALL)01/95] Steering Your Vehicle%*[DR15800(ALL)01/95] Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power steering uses

energy from the engine to help steer your vehicle.

%*[DR15900(ALL)04/95] If the amount of effort needed to steer your vehicle changes at aconstant vehicle speed, have the power steering system checked.If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine isturned off), you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes moreeffort.

*[DR16000(ALL)01/95] Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or left formore than five seconds if the engine is running. This candamage the power steering pump.

[DR16200(ALL)01/95] Brakes%*[DR16300(ALL)01/95] Applying the Brakes

[DR16450(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle may have four-wheel power anti-lock disc brakesor power front disc and rear drum anti-lock brakes which adjustautomatically through everyday use.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

148

[DR16575(ALL)11/94] If your vehicle does not have anti-lock brakes, it may havefour-wheel power disc brakes or power front disc brakes andrear drum brakes, which adjust automatically as the brake padsor linings wear down.

[DR16700(ALL)05/95] If your vehicle does not have anti-lock brakes, apply the brakepedal gradually. Use the “squeeze” technique — push on thebrake pedal with a steadily increasing force. This allows thewheels to continue to roll while you are slowing down, whichlets you steer properly.

*[DR16800(ALL)05/95] If your vehicle does not have anti-lock brakes, extreme brakingcan make the wheels lock and slide, causing you to lose controlof the steering. If the wheels lock, release the brake pedal andrepeat the “squeeze” technique.

*[DR16900(ALL)05/95] Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal; youwill wear out the linings and increase your vehicle’s stoppingdistance. Brake rotor damage may also eventually occur.

*[DR17000(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to alower gear and do not apply your brakescontinuously. If you apply your brakes continuously,they may overheat and become less effective.

*[DR17100(ALL)03/95] Occasional brake squeal during light to moderate stops does notaffect the function of the brake system and is normal. However,if the squeal becomes louder or more frequent, have yourbrakes inspected by your dealer or a qualified service technician.

[DR17350(ALL)05/95] Anti-lock Brake System (If equipped)

*[DR17450(ALL)11/94] Your vehicle may come with the optional anti-lock brakesystem. Whenever your wheels start to lock (which could resultin a skid) the anti-lock brake system prevents the lock-up byautomatically releasing and re-applying the brakes. The brakepedal will pulsate as a result of the automatic releasing andre-applying of the brakes. In spite of this improvement inbraking performance, you should continue to be cautious in all

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

Driving Your Mystique

149

hazardous driving situations, especially when driving onhazardous road surfaces. Even with your anti-lock brake system,you may not have total control of your vehicle when braking onroads with loose surfaces such as snow or gravel, holes in thepavement, or alternating patches of slippery and dry surfaces.

*[DR17500(ALL)05/95] If the brake pedal is applied while the vehicle is driven overuneven road surfaces, the ABS may cycle and the driver maysense a pulsation in the brake pedal, accompanied by a slightup and down movement of the pedal height and a clickingsound. This may also happen when driving on an inclinedsurface such as a driveway while making a sharp turn. This is anormal condition.

[DR17600(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle may have an Anti-lock Brake System feature. If itdoes, check the Anti-lock Brake System light each time you startthe engine. If it stays on longer than three (3) seconds, shut offthe engine and restart. If it stays on, that means the Anti-lockBrake feature is not working and should be servicedimmediately to restore the benefits of the Anti-lock feature.Normal braking is not affected unless the brake warning light isalso lit.

[DR17650(ALL)05/95] The Anti-lock Brake System has self-check capabilities. Asdescribed above, the system turns on the anti-lock light eachtime you start your engine. After the engine is started and theanti-lock light turns off, the system performs another test thefirst time the vehicle reaches 5 mph (8 km/h) (12 mph[20 km/h] for vehicles equipped with the traction controlsystem). The system turns on the ABS pump motor forapproximately 1/2 second. At this time, a mechanical noise maybe heard and felt. This is a normal part of the self-check feature.If a malfunction is found during this check the anti-lock lightwill come on.

*[DR17700(ALL)12/93] Ford Motor Company has not found any negative effects ofmobile radio transmitting equipment installed on vehicles withthe ABS system providing that the radio is installed according

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

150

to the radio manufacturer’s instructions. However, if you havehad a mobile radio transmitter installed and the check ABS lightcomes on (at any time other than immediately after turning thekey to the ON position) have your mobile radio dealer inspectthe radio installation. Also, if the ABS system is activated otherthan during maximum braking, have your mobile radioinstallation checked.

*[DR17800(ALL)03/95] Parking Brake

*[DR17900(ALL)01/95] The parking brake should be used whenever you park yourvehicle.

*[DR18100(ALL)11/93] The parking brake lever is located between the front seats. Toset the parking brake, put your foot on the brake pedal whilepulling the parking brake handle fully and firmly upward.

*[DR18300(ALL)12/89] To release the parking brake, put your foot on the brake pedal,pull the handle upward and push the button. Then lower thehandle to the released position while holding the button in.

*[DR18400(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Always set the parking brake fully and make sure thatthe gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatictransaxle) or in 1 (First) (manual transaxle).

*[DR18500(ALL)11/91] RWARNING

To prevent personal injury, do not release the parkingbrake while outside the vehicle.

*[DR18700(ALL)01/93] RWARNING

If the parking brake is fully released, but the BrakeSystem light remains on, have the brakes checkedimmediately. They may not be working properly.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

Driving Your Mystique

151

*[DR19000(ALL)01/95] The parking brake is not designed to stop a moving vehicle, butyou can use the parking brake to stop your vehicle in anemergency if the normal brakes fail. However, since the parkingbrake applies only the rear brakes, the stopping distance willincrease greatly and the handling of your vehicle will beadversely affected.

*[DR19050(ALL)03/95] Always check the Brake Warning Light each time you start yourengine. Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakesto wear out quickly and will reduce the fuel economy.

%*[DR19100(ALL)01/95] Driving Under Special Conditions

*[DR19200(ALL)01/95] Tips for Safe Driving

*[DR19300(ALL)05/95] As with any new vehicle, yours may drive and handledifferently from your previous vehicle. Use care until youbecome accustomed to its various features and drivingcharacteristics.

*[DR19400(ALL)03/95] Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits. Suddenacceleration, deceleration, turning, or combinations of thesemaneuvers can cause a vehicle to behave differently thananticipated.

%*[DR19750(ALL)01/95] Driving in Bad Weather

%*[DR19800(ALL)01/95] Slippery roads

*[DR19900(ALL)03/95] On some slippery road surfaces, front-wheel drive may providebetter acceleration than rear-wheel drive. However, this does notmean that your vehicle can stop any faster or any better than avehicle with rear-wheel drive. Exercise the same caution whiledriving on slippery roads with your front-wheel drive vehicle asyou would with a rear-wheel drive vehicle.

*[DR20100(ALL)03/95] ■ Do not quickly move the steering wheel unless necessary.

*[DR20200(ALL)01/95] ■ Drive slower than you normally would.

*[DR20400(ALL)01/95] ■ Give your vehicle more distance to stop.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

152

*[DR20505(ALL)01/92] ■ Pump the brake pedal steadily and evenly to avoid lockingyour wheels.

*[DR20600(ALL)02/93] ■ Consider using one of the lower gears.

*[DR20700(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

To avoid losing control on slippery roads, do notdownshift into 1 (First) with the automatic transaxlewhen moving faster than 20 mph (32 km/h). Do notdownshift into 1 (First) with the manual transaxle whenmoving faster than 10 mph (16 km/h).

*[DR20750(ALL)03/95] RWARNING

If your vehicle has speed control, do not use it onslippery roads. You could lose control of your vehicleand could injure someone.

*[DR20800(ALL)01/95] If you have an automatic transaxle and your vehicle gets stuck(for example, in mud or snow), you may try to “rock” it out ofthe spot. Shift, in a steady rhythm, between forward and reversegears. While in each gear, press lightly on the accelerator andrelease.

*[DR20900(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h). Thetires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.

*[DR21000(ALL)03/95] By moving the vehicle backward and forward, you may gainenough momentum to move out of the spot. Do not rock thevehicle for more than a few minutes. This may overheat theengine, damage the transaxle, or damage the tires. If you arestill stuck after a minute or two of rocking, call for a tow truck.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

Driving Your Mystique

153

%*[DR21200(ALL)01/95] High water

*[DR21300(ALL)01/95] Do not drive through flooded areas unless you are sure that thewater is below the bottom of the wheel rims.

*[DR21400(ALL)04/94] If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. You mayhave limited traction or wet brakes, so allow extra stoppingdistance because your vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual.

*[DR21500(ALL)01/95] After you drive through the standing water, apply your brakesgently several times as your vehicle moves slowly. This helps todry the brakes.

*[DR21600(ALL)03/95] Driving With a Heavy Load

*[DR21700(ALL)01/95] There are limits to the amount of weight your vehicle can carryor tow. The total weight of your vehicle, plus the weight of thepassengers and cargo, should never be more than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weight that yourvehicle carries over the front axle and rear axle should never bemore than the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for therespective axle.

%*[DR21800(ALL)01/95] You can find your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label on the left front door lock facingor on the door latch post pillar.

*[DR21900(ALL)01/95] The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affect the GVWR orGAWR limitations. Usage of replacement tires with higherweight limit than originals does not increase GVWR or GAWR.Usage of lower capacity replacement tires may lower GVWRand GAWR limitations.

*[DR22000(ALL)02/95] RWARNING

If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label is exceeded, your vehiclemay be damaged or you may lose control and injuresomeone.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

154

%*[DR22050(ALL)01/95] Limiting Your Vehicle’s Load

[DR22150(ALL)01/95] The load that you add to your vehicle must not exceed themaximum load stated on the Safety Compliance CertificationLabel attached to the left front door pillar or the left front doorlock facing.

*[DR22250(ALL)01/95] To figure the weight of your vehicle’s load, add the weights of:

*[DR22350(ALL)01/95] ■ the driver and passengers

*[DR22400(ALL)01/95] ■ luggage and any other items that you put in your vehicle

*[DR22500(ALL)01/95] ■ the tongue load of the loaded trailer

*[DR22600(ALL)01/95] ■ the weight of any equipment that has been added to yourvehicle since it was delivered to your dealer

*[DR22700(ALL)01/95] If you do not know the actual weights of these items, use thefollowing procedure to figure the weight of a load:

*[DR22800(ALL)01/95] 1. Weigh your vehicle without the driver, passengers andluggage. You might take your vehicle to a shipping companyor an inspection station for trucks.

*[DR22900(ALL)01/95] 2. Then weigh your vehicle with the driver, passengers andluggage.

*[DR23000(ALL)01/95] 3. Subtract the first reading from the second to figure the totalweight of the load.

*[DR23100(ALL)01/95] After determining this load, you must also make sure that thetotal weight of your vehicle, plus the load it carries, is less thanits GVWR. Also, make sure that the weight your vehicle carriesover each axle is less than the GAWR for the respective axle.

*[DR23200(ALL)01/95] You can find the GVWR and GAWR on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label on the left front door lock facing or the doorlatch post pillar.

*[DR23300(ALL)01/95] If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargo from yourvehicle accordingly. If your vehicle exceeds the GAWR foreither axle, shift the load or remove cargo accordingly.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

Driving Your Mystique

155

*[DR23400(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Improper distribution of your vehicle’s load or carryingweight in excess of the amount shown on the tire decalcan cause rapid tire wear or loss of vehicle control.

*[DR23500(ALL)04/95] Trailer Towing[DR23600(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is capable of towing a trailer of up to a maximum

of 1,000 lbs. (454 kg) gross trailer weight with a maximumtongue load of 100 lbs (45 kg). It should also have 25 sq. ft.(2.3 sq. meters) or less frontal area. Do not drive faster than55 mph (90 km/h) while towing a 1,000 lb. (454 kg) trailer.

*[DR23700(ALL)01/95] Your vehicle does not come from the factory fully equipped totow. No towing packages are available through Ford orLincoln/Mercury dealers.

*[DR23800(ALL)01/95] Because towing a trailer puts extra strain on your vehicle, youmust follow certain precautions for your safety and the good ofyour vehicle:

*[DR25800(ALL)11/92] ■ Stay within the load limits when you tow. (See Knowing YourVehicle’s Load Limits.)

*[DR25900(ALL)01/95] ■ Carefully and thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing,making sure to use the right equipment and to attach itproperly. (See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.)

*[DR26000(ALL)01/95] ■ Use extra caution when driving your vehicle while you tow.(See Driving while you tow in this chapter.)

*[DR26100(ALL)01/95] ■ Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer.(See Servicing your vehicle if you tow in this chapter.)

*[DR26300(ALL)01/95] Ten to 15% of the loaded trailer’s weight should be on thetongue. However, the tongue load should never exceed 10% ofthe maximum weight that your vehicle can safely tow.

*[DR26400(ALL)01/95] New vehicles should be driven 2,000 miles (3,200 km) beforetowing a trailer.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

156

*[DR26500(ALL)06/95] RWARNING

Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommendedgross trailer weight exceeds the limits of the vehicle andcould result in engine damage, transaxle/axle damage,structural damage, loss of control, and personal injury.

*[DR26600(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire isbeing used.

*[DR27000(ALL)04/95] You should also limit your trailer’s load when you tow in highaltitudes.

*[DR28500(ALL)01/95] Preparing to Tow

*[DR28600(ALL)01/95] For your safety and for the good of your vehicle, use the rightequipment for the type of trailer you tow. Also, make sure thatall towing equipment is properly attached to your vehicle. Ifyou are not certain that you are using the right equipment inthe proper manner, see your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

*[DR28700(ALL)01/95] Do not use hitches that clamp onto your vehicle’s bumper. Thebumper is not designed to bear the load.

%*[DR28750(ALL)01/95] Using the hitch

*[DR28800(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle uses a load carrying hitch. Because this type ofhitch places the tongue load of a trailer on the rear wheels ofyour vehicle, you must distribute the load in your trailer so that10 to 15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.

*[DR28900(ALL)01/95] Tie down the load so that it does not shift and change theweight on the hitch. This will prevent damage to your vehicleand make your vehicle easier to handle.

%*[DR28950(ALL)01/95] Connecting the safety chains

*[DR29000(ALL)01/95] Always attach the trailer’s safety chains to your vehicle. Theyhelp protect your trailer if the hitch breaks.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

Driving Your Mystique

157

*[DR29100(ALL)01/95] To connect the trailer’s safety chains:

*[DR29200(ALL)01/95] 1. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and attach them toyour vehicle’s frame or hook retainers. Never attach thesafety chains to your vehicle’s bumper. The bumper is notdesigned to bear the weight of a trailer.

*[DR29300(ALL)01/95] 2. Make sure that you leave enough slack in the chains toallow you to turn corners.

*[DR29400(ALL)01/95] If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rentalagency gives you.

%*[DR29450(ALL)01/95] Connecting the trailer’s brakes

*[DR29500(ALL)01/95] Electric brakes and manual, automatic, or surge-type hydraulicbrakes are safe if you install them properly and adjust themaccording to the manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure that yourtrailer’s brakes meet local and federal regulations.

*[DR29600(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directlyto your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may nothave enough braking power and your chances of havinga collision greatly increase.

%*[DR29650(ALL)01/95] Connecting the trailer’s lights

*[DR29700(ALL)01/95] Do not connect a trailer’s lighting system wiring directly toyour vehicle’s lighting system wiring. To get the properequipment for hooking up your trailer’s lights, see your localtrailer dealer and your Ford dealer. Be sure to follow theirinstructions carefully.

*[DR29800(ALL)01/95] If you do not install trailer lights correctly, you may causedamage to the vehicle’s lighting system.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

158

%*[DR29900(ALL)01/95] Driving While You Tow

*[DR30000(ALL)05/95] Be especially careful when driving while you tow a trailer.Never drive faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) when you tow inhilly country on hot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you canbrake gradually.

[DR30050(ALL)01/95] If your vehicle has a manual transaxle and you are towing atrailer, you should select gear positions which will avoid jerkingor excessive engine speed. If you need to drive excessively in1 (First) or 2 (Second), it may indicate that the trailer is too bigor heavily loaded for your vehicle’s drivetrain. Continuousdriving in these two gears while towing a trailer is notrecommended.

[DR30100(ALL)11/94] When you tow up or down steep hills, move the manualtransaxle gearshift to a lower gear. This will increase enginepower on upgrades and engine braking on downgrades.

[DR30175(ALL)04/95] When you tow in steep hills, move the automatic transaxle to1 (First) when descending. This will give more engine brakingon downgrades. The automatic transaxle will automaticallydownshift to the proper gear on upgrades.

%*[DR30300(ALL)01/95] If you use the speed control while you are towing on very long,steep grades, the speed control may shut off.

[DR30400(ALL)05/95] Servicing Your Vehicle If You Tow

*[DR30500(ALL)08/93] If you tow a trailer for a long distance, your vehicle will needto be serviced more frequently than usual. Refer to theMaintenance Schedule and Record booklet for additionalinformation.

File:cddrz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:04:09 1996

159

Roadside Emergencies

*[RE00310(ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting Your Vehicle

*[RE00320(ALL)01/95] Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave the lights on or anyelectrical equipment on after you turn the engine off. If thishappens, you may be able to jump-start from a booster batteryto start your vehicle.

*[RE00400(ALL)02/95] RWARNING

The gases around the battery can explode if exposed toflames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could resultin injury or vehicle damage.

*[RE00500(ALL)02/95] RWARNING

To protect yourself when charging a battery, alwaysshield your face and eyes. Make sure that you canbreathe fresh air.

%*[RE00700(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting abattery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with acarrier or with your hands on the opposite corners.

%*[RE00800(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes,and clothing.

File:cdrez.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:34 1996

160

*[RE00850(ALL)06/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing,immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. Ifsomeone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milkor water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetableoil. Call a doctor immediately.

*[RE00900(ALL)03/95] To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery, and to avoidinjury to yourself, follow these directions for preparing yourvehicle to jump-start and connecting the jumper cables in theorder they are given. If in doubt, call for road service.

*[RE01000(ALL)03/95] Preparing Your Vehicle

*[RE01100(ALL)03/95] 1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, so you need touse a 12-volt jumper system. You will damage your startingmotor, ignition system, and other electrical parts if youconnect them to a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-voltbatteries in series or a 24-volt generator set).

*[RE01200(ALL)03/95] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle. Youcould damage the vehicle’s electrical system.

*[RE01300(ALL)04/95] 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabledvehicle. Make sure the vehicles do not touch each other. Setthe parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of theengine cooling fan and other moving parts.

*[RE01400(ALL)03/95] 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessivecorrosion before you attach the jumper cables.

*[RE01600(ALL)03/95] 5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles. Press the DEFROSTbutton. Turn off all other switches and gauges.

File:cdrez.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:34 1996

Roadside Emergencies

161

%*[RE01700(ALL)05/95] Connecting the jumper cables

*[RE02500(ALL)03/95] 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal of the discharged battery. (You can connect eitherjumper cable to the positive (+) terminal, as long as you usethe same cable for both positive terminals.) Most jumpercables have a red cable and a black cable. The red cable isgenerally used for the positive terminals and the black forthe negative ones.

*[RE02600(ALL)04/95] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable to the positive (+)terminal of the booster battery.

*[RE02700(ALL)05/95] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to the negative (s)terminal of the booster battery — NOT to the dischargedbattery.

*[RE02800(ALL)04/95] 4. Connect the other end of the second cable to a good metallicsurface on the engine or frame of the disabled vehicle.

*[RE02900(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not connect the end of the second cable to thenegative (s) terminal of the battery to be jumped. Aspark may cause an explosion of the gases that surroundthe battery.

File:cdrez.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:34 1996

162

[RE02975(ALL)01/95]

27-1/2 pica art:0001006-E

Sequence for connecting jumper cables

File:cdrez.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:34 1996

Roadside Emergencies

163

*[RE03400(ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting

*[RE03600(ALL)03/95] 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not in the way ofmoving engine parts, then start the booster vehicle. Run theengine at a moderate speed.

*[RE03700(ALL)03/95] 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a few minutes and thenstart the disabled vehicle. It may take a couple of tries beforethe vehicle starts. If the vehicle does not start after severalattempts, there may be a different problem.

*[RE03800(ALL)03/95] 3. When both vehicles are running, let them idle for a fewminutes to charge the discharged battery.

*[RE03900(ALL)03/95] Removing jumper cables

*[RE04000(ALL)03/95] 1. Always remove the jumper cables in the reverse order.Remove the negative (–) end of the jumper cable from themetallic surface on the engine or frame of the disabledvehicle.

*[RE04100(ALL)05/95] 2. Remove the negative (–) cable from the booster battery.

*[RE04200(ALL)03/95] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from the booster battery.

*[RE04300(ALL)05/95] 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+) cable from thedischarged battery.

*[RE04400(ALL)04/95] After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a while to let theengine “relearn” its idle conditions. Drive it around for a whilewith all electrical accessories turned off to let the batteryrecharge. You may need to use a battery charger to fullyrecharge the battery.

*[RE04450(ALL)03/95] If you need to replace your battery, see Battery in the ServicingYour Vehicle chapter.

File:cdrez.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:34 1996

164

*[RE04500(ALL)03/95] Changing a Tire

*[RE04600(ALL)01/95] If you get a flat tire while you are driving, do not apply thebrake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease the speed. Hold thesteering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on theside of the road. Park on a level spot, turn off the ignition, setthe parking brake, and turn on the hazard flashers.

*[RE04700(ALL)03/95] The Temporary Spare Tire

*[RE04800(ALL)03/95] You may have a high pressure temporary spare tire. This sparetire is smaller than a regular tire and is designed for emergencyuse only. Use it only when you get a flat tire and replace it assoon as you can. This spare tire is marked with the words“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so that you can easily identify it.

*[RE04900(ALL)01/93] RWARNING

If you use the temporary spare tire continuously or donot follow these precautions, the tire could fail, causingyou to lose control of the vehicle, possibly injuringyourself or others.

*[RE05000(ALL)01/95] When you drive with the temporary spare tire, DO NOT:

*[RE05100(ALL)01/95] ■ exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under any circumstances.

*[RE05200(ALL)01/95] ■ load your vehicle so that it is heavier than the maximumvehicle load rating listed on the tire decal.

*[RE05300(ALL)01/95] ■ tow a trailer.

*[RE05400(ALL)01/95] ■ use tire chains on this tire.

*[RE05500(ALL)01/95] ■ try to repair the temporary spare tire or remove it from itswheel.

*[RE05600(ALL)01/95] ■ use the wheel for any other type of vehicle.

File:cdrez.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:34 1996

Roadside Emergencies

165

*[RE05700(ALL)01/95] ■ drive through an automatic car wash with this tire. Becausethe temporary spare tire is smaller than a conventional tire,it reduces the ground clearance. Your vehicle may get caughtin the rails and it could be damaged.

*[RE06000(ALL)03/95] Spare Tire Location

*[RE06120(ALL)01/95] The spare tire is stored under the carpet on the floor of thetrunk.

[RE06150(ALL)04/94] You will find additional instructions for the spare tire on thewheel decal (located on the temporary spare wheel).

[RE06550(ALL)02/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0000531-BThe temporary spare tire

File:cdrez.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:34 1996

166

*[RE07400(ALL)03/95] Preparing to Change the Tire

[RE07650(ALL)05/94] 1. Make sure that your vehicle will not move or roll. If youhave an automatic transaxle, put the gearshift in P (Park). Ifyou have a manual transaxle, put the gearshift in 1 (First).Set the parking brake and block the wheel that is diagonallyopposite the tire that you are changing.

[RE08500(ALL)05/95] When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transaxlealone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping offthe jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Automatic) or 1 (Manual).To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change one ofthe front tires, put a block behind the wheel that is diagonallyopposite to the tire.

*[RE08600(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone elsecould be seriously injured.

*[RE08800(ALL)05/95] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack.

*[RE08825(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel offthe ground, such as when changing a tire.

[RE08850(ALL)01/95] 3. Remove the wheel cover from the wheel with the taperedend of the wheel lug wrench. Insert and twist the handle,then pry against the inner wheel cover flange. Forinformation about removing optional wheel center ornamentssee Styled Polycast Wheel Ornaments later in this section.

[RE09200(ALL)01/95] 4. Loosen the wheel lug nuts by pulling up on the handle ofthe wrench one-half turn counterclockwise. Do not removethe wheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off the ground.For information about removing anti-theft lug nuts, seeAnti-Theft Wheel Lug Nuts later in this section.

File:cdrez.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:34 1996

Roadside Emergencies

167

*[RE09250(ALL)05/95] Removing and Replacing the Tire

[RE09300(ALL)01/95] 1. Place the scissors-type jack under the side of the vehicle andadjust the jack height with the jack handle. The jack shouldfit in the notch in the vertical rocker panel flange which isnearest to the wheel to be changed. The front and rearjacking notches on each side of the vehicle are marked byarrows in the rocker panel.

*[RE09800(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any partof your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Donot start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack.The jack is only meant for changing the tire.

[RE10030(ALL)04/94]

17-1/2 pica art:0000528-E

The notches for the jack

File:cdrez.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:34 1996

168

*[RE10200(ALL)01/95] 2. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel clears theground. Remove the wheel lug nuts.

*[RE12100(ALL)01/95] 3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure that theair valve stem is facing outward.

*[RE12200(ALL)03/95] 4. Reinstall the lug nuts, tightening until the wheel is snugagainst the hub. The beveled edges on the lug nuts faceinward. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until you lower thevehicle. If you do, you could force the vehicle off the jack.

*[RE12300(ALL)02/95] 5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise.

*[RE12400(ALL)01/95] 6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the ordershown in the following illustration. As soon as possible, haveyour dealer or a qualified service technician check the lugnuts for proper torque specifications.

[RE12550(ALL)04/94]

13-1/2 pica

art:0000498-D The lug nuts on the wheel

File:cdrez.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:34 1996

Roadside Emergencies

169

*[RE12600(ALL)11/94] 7. Place any wheel covers and ornaments in the trunk.

*[RE12700(ALL)03/95] 8. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. Make sure the jack issecurely fastened so it does not rattle when you drive.

*[RE12750(ALL)01/95] 9. Unblock the wheels.

[RE12900(ALL)05/95] Removing and Replacing Styled Polycast WheelOrnaments

[RE13000(ALL)05/95] To remove a wheel ornament, insert the tapered end of the jackhandle between the ornament and wheel and pry the ornamentfrom the wheel.

[RE13005(ALL)05/95] To install the polycast wheel center ornament, you should insertone side of the ornament into the center of the wheel openingand strike the opposite side with the palm of your hand untilthe ornament is seated in the opening.

%*[RE14100(ALL)03/95] Anti-Theft Wheel Lug Nuts (If equipped)

[RE14200(ALL)01/95] If your vehicle has this option, one of the lug nuts on eachwheel locks and must be unlocked with a special key. If youlose the key, send the registration card to the manufacturer(not to the dealer) to get a replacement key.

[RE14250(ALL)05/94] NOTE: If you lose your lug wrench/lug nut key assembly, seeyour nearest Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer who hasaccess to a master set of keys.

*[RE14300(ALL)03/95] DO NOT USE A POWER IMPACT WRENCH ON THE LUGNUT KEY.

File:cdrez.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:34 1996

170

[RE14325(ALL)02/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0000529-BThe anti-theft lug nut and key

*[RE14400(ALL)03/95] Removing the anti-theft lug nut

*[RE14600(ALL)03/95] Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Make sure that youhold the key square to the lug nut. If you hold the key on anangle, you may damage the key and the lug nut.

*[RE14700(ALL)03/95] Place the lug nut wrench over the lug nut key and applypressure on the key with the wrench. Turn the wrench in acounterclockwise direction to remove the lug nut.

*[RE14800(ALL)03/95] Replacing the anti-theft lug nut

*[RE14900(ALL)03/95] Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Place the lug nutwrench over the lug nut key and, while applying pressure onthe key, install the lug nut.

File:cdrez.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:34 1996

Roadside Emergencies

171

*[RE15050(ALL)02/95] If the Engine Cranks But Does Not Start orDoes Not Start After a Collision

*[RE15100(ALL)04/95] The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch

*[RE15200(ALL)03/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or if you have had acollision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have beentriggered. The shut-off switch is a device that stops the fuelpump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt.

*[RE15250(ALL)01/95] For information on how to check and reset the fuel pumpshut-off switch, see Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Index.

*[RE16400(ALL)05/95] Towing Your Vehicle

*[RE16500(ALL)04/95] If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professionaltowing service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistancecenter. Recommended towing options include wheel lift towingor flat bed towing.

File:cdrez.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:34 1996

172

[RE16600(ALL)05/95]

three fourths page

art:0001100-D

*[RE16700(ALL)04/95] When calling for a tow truck, tell the operator what kind ofvehicle you have. A towing manual is available from FordMotor Company for all authorized tow truck operators. Haveyour tow truck driver refer to this manual for the properhook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.

File:cdrez.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:34 1996

Roadside Emergencies

173

*[RE18000(ALL)03/95] Towing Your Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

*[RE18100(ALL)03/95] At times, you may want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as a recreational vehicle, a car, or a truck.

*[RE18200(ALL)03/95] Before you have your vehicle towed:

*[RE18300(ALL)03/95] ■ Release the parking brake.

*[RE18400(ALL)03/95] ■ Move the gearshift to N (Neutral).

[RE18500(ALL)03/95] ■ Turn the ignition to the OFF position.

*[RE18600(ALL)03/95] ■ Unlock the steering wheel.

[RE18700(ALL)05/95] Do not tow your vehicle at a speed faster than 35 mph(55 km/h) or for a distance greater than 50 miles (80 km)unless the drive wheels are placed on dollies.

[RE18900(ALL)05/95] Do not tow your vehicle at a speed faster than 55 mph(90 km/h) if you have a manual transaxle. Your maximumtowing distance is unlimited.

*[RE19000(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never use a tow bar that attaches to the bumper whenyou tow your vehicle. This could damage the bumperand cause an accident.

File:cdrez.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:34 1996

175

Customer Assistance

*[HS00205(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance

*[HS00210(ALL)05/95] Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour, seven-day-a-weekhotline with trained operators that put you in touch with thehelp you need if you experience a problem with your vehicle.This complimentary service is provided to you throughout yourwarranty period of 3 years or 36,000 miles (3 years or60,000 km), whichever comes first. To purchase RoadsideAssistance coverages beyond this period, through Ford AutoClub, contact your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer (notavailable in Canada).

*[HS00215(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance will cover the following:

*[HS00220(ALL)06/94] ■ Mount your spare if you have a flat tire.

*[HS00225(ALL)06/94] ■ Jump-start your battery if it is dead.

*[HS00230(ALL)06/94] ■ Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out.

*[HS00235(ALL)06/94] ■ Bring you fuel if you run out.

*[HS00240(ALL)06/94] ■ Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Even non-warrantyrelated tows, like accidents or getting stuck in mud or snow,are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound towingand repossession).

*[HS00245(ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance

*[HS00250(ALL)06/94] Your Roadside Assistance identification card can be found in theOwner Guide portfolio in your glove compartment. Completethe card and place it in your wallet for quick reference.

*[HS00255(ALL)04/95] To receive roadside assistance in the United States call1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).

*[HS00260(ALL)04/95] Should you need to arrange for roadside assistance yourself,Ford Motor Company will reimburse the reasonable cost. Toobtain information about reimbursement call 1-800-241-FORD (inCanada call 1-800-665-2006).

File:cdhsz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:01 1996

176

*[HS00300(ALL)01/95] If You Have a Service Problem

*[HS00400(ALL)01/95] Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford and Lincoln-Mercurydealerships that can service your vehicle for you. This chaptertells you how to get service or maintenance for your vehicle.

%*[HS00500(ALL)03/95] Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or Canada)

*[HS00600(ALL)04/95] Ford recommends taking your vehicle to your selling dealerwho wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. You may,however, take your vehicle to any authorized Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, your dealer will be ableto resolve your concern.

*[HS00700(ALL)04/95] If you are not satisfied with the service you received from yourdealership’s service department, talk to the service manager atthe dealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk to the owneror general manager of the dealership. In most cases, you willhave your concern resolved at this level.

*[HS01000(ALL)04/95] If you are away from home when your vehicle needs to beserviced, or if you need more help than the dealer gave you,contact the Ford Customer Assistance Center to find anauthorized dealership that may be able to help you.

[HS01125(ALL)01/95]

6 pica art:0001312-A

*[HS01150(ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions or concerns thatthe dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer AssistanceCentre.

File:cdhsz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:01 1996

Customer Assistance

177

[HS01175(ALL)01/95]

6 pica art:0001313-A

*[HS01200(ALL)04/95] Please have the following information available when contactingFord Customer Assistance:

*[HS01300(ALL)04/95] ■ your telephone number (both business and home)

*[HS01400(ALL)04/95] ■ the name of the dealer and the city where the dealership islocated

*[HS01500(ALL)04/95] ■ the year and make of your vehicle

*[HS01550(ALL)04/95] ■ the date purchased

*[HS01600(ALL)03/95] ■ the current mileage on your vehicle

%*[HS01700(ALL)03/95] ■ your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed on yourowner card and/or your vehicle ownership license

[HS01750(ALL)05/95]

6 pica art:0001195-A

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN/Serial Number)

*[HS02200(ALL)03/95] If you still have a service or product complaint, you may wishto contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. only) or theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in Canada.

File:cdhsz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:01 1996

178

*[HS02300(ALL)02/95] The Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. Only)

*[HS02400(ALL)03/95] The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary, independentdispute-settlement program available free to owners or lesseesof qualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles.

*[HS02500(ALL)01/95] The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states.Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations, modify procedures and/or to discontinue thisprocess at any time without notice and without incurringobligations.

*[HS02600(ALL)01/95] What Kind of Cases Does the Board Review?

*[HS02700(ALL)03/95] The Board reviews all product performance and servicecomplaints on Ford, Mercury and Lincoln Cars and Ford andMercury Light Trucks under warranty that have not beenresolved by a dealer or Ford Motor Company.

*[HS02750(ALL)03/95] The Board does not review issues involving:

*[HS02800(ALL)01/95] ■ A non-Ford product

*[HS02900(ALL)01/95] ■ A non-Ford dealership

*[HS03100(ALL)01/95] ■ A vehicle sales transaction

*[HS03200(ALL)01/95] ■ A request for reimbursement of consequential expensesunless incidental to a service or product complaint beingreviewed

*[HS03300(ALL)01/95] ■ Items not covered by your warranty

*[HS03400(ALL)01/95] ■ Alleged liability claims

*[HS03450(ALL)01/95] ■ Property damage where such damage is significant whencompared to the economic loss alleged under the warrantydispute

*[HS03500(ALL)01/95] ■ Cases currently in litigation

File:cdhsz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:01 1996

Customer Assistance

179

*[HS03600(ALL)01/95] ■ Vehicles not used primarily for personal, family, orhousehold purposes

*[HS03650(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles on which applicableexpress written new vehicle warranties have expired atreceipt of your application are not eligible. Eligibilitymay differ according to state law. For example, see theunique brochure for California purchasers/lessees.

*[HS03700(ALL)04/95] How Does the Board Work?

*[HS03800(ALL)04/95] The Board has four members:

*[HS03900(ALL)04/95] ■ three consumer representatives

*[HS04000(ALL)04/95] ■ a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer

*[HS04200(ALL)04/95] Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited andtrained by an independent consulting firm. Dealers are chosenbecause of their business leadership qualities.

*[HS04300(ALL)04/95] If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and 36,000 miles ofthe date of delivery (warranty start date), you have a right tomake an oral presentation before the Board by indicating yourchoice on the application. Also, oral presentations may berequested by the Board. A decision is made by the Board bysimple majority vote.

*[HS04350(ALL)04/95] Board members review all the materials related to eachcomplaint and, based on the available information, arrive at afair and impartial decision. Decisions are based on the writtenstatements and any oral presentations made by each of theinvolved parties.

*[HS04400(ALL)04/95] Because the Board usually meets only once a month, some caseswill take longer than 30 days to be reviewed. The Board willmake every effort to resolve each case within 40 days after itreceives the customer application form.

File:cdhsz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:01 1996

180

*[HS04500(ALL)04/95] After your case has been reviewed, the Board will mail you itsdecision in writing. It will also provide you with a form toindicate your acceptance or rejection of an award decision. Thedecisions of the Board are binding on the dealer and Ford, butcustomers may have other options available to them under stateor federal law.

*[HS04600(ALL)04/95] The decisions of the Board, however, may be introduced intoevidence by any party in subsequent legal proceedings that maybe initiated.

*[HS04700(ALL)01/95] How Do You Contact the Board?

*[HS04800(ALL)04/95] Write to the Board at the following address to request abrochure/application. You will be sent a brochure and aone-page customer application form. The form should becompleted and mailed to the same address.

[HS04900(ALL)05/94]

6 pica art:0001306-A

*[HS05100(ALL)04/95] What is the Review Process?

*[HS05200(ALL)04/95] Your application will be reviewed and if it is determined to beeligible, you will receive an acknowledgment indicating the filenumber assigned to your application and the local Boardaddress. At the same time, your dealer and Ford MotorCompany representative are asked to submit statements.

File:cdhsz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:01 1996

Customer Assistance

181

*[HS05300(ALL)04/95] To review your case properly, the Board needs the followinginformation:

*[HS05400(ALL)04/95] ■ legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repairorders that relate to the case

*[HS05500(ALL)04/95] ■ the year, make, model, and vehicle identification number

*[HS05600(ALL)04/95] ■ the date you bought your vehicle

*[HS05700(ALL)04/95] ■ the date of repair and the mileage at the time of repair

*[HS05800(ALL)04/95] ■ the current mileage

*[HS05900(ALL)04/95] ■ the name of the dealer who sold you the vehicle or whoserviced your vehicle

*[HS06000(ALL)04/95] ■ a brief description of your unresolved complaint

*[HS06100(ALL)05/95] ■ a brief summary of actions that were taken with the dealerand Ford Motor Company

*[HS06200(ALL)05/95] ■ the names (if known) of all people you contacted at thedealership

*[HS06300(ALL)04/95] ■ a description of the action you want done to resolve yourconcern.

*[HS06310(ALL)04/95] Should your application NOT qualify for review, an explanationwill be mailed to you.

*[HS06320(ALL)04/95] Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)

*[HS06340(ALL)01/95] If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.

*[HS06360(ALL)01/95] If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company.

File:cdhsz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:01 1996

182

*[HS06380(ALL)01/95] To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C.area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

*[HS07700(ALL)05/95] Ford of Canada Customer Assistance

*[HS07850(ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions or concerns thatthe dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer AssistanceCentre.

[HS07950(ALL)05/94]

6 pica art:0001313-A

*[HS07975(ALL)04/95] Please have the following information available when contactingthe Customer Assistance Centre:

*[HS08000(ALL)04/95] ■ your telephone number (both business and home)

*[HS08020(ALL)04/95] ■ the name of the dealer and the city where the dealership islocated

*[HS08040(ALL)04/95] ■ the year and make of your vehicle

*[HS08050(ALL)04/95] ■ the date purchased

*[HS08060(ALL)03/95] ■ the current mileage on your vehicle

%*[HS08080(ALL)03/95] ■ your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed on yourowner card and/or your vehicle ownership license

File:cdhsz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:01 1996

Customer Assistance

183

%*[HS08100(ALL)03/95] Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)

*[HS08200(ALL)03/95] If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot bereached between a vehicle owner, Ford of Canada, and/or oneof its dealers (that all parties can agree upon), the owner maywish to use the services offered by the Canadian Motor VehicleArbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

*[HS08300(ALL)05/95] CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators toassist consumers in scheduling and preparing for theirarbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed withCAMVAP you must follow your manufacturer’s disputeresolution process as outlined under “Service/MaintenanceConcerns (U.S. or Canada)” earlier in this chapter.

*[HS08400(ALL)05/95] Consumers wishing to obtain further information about theprogram can obtain an information booklet from your dealer orcontact the Provincial Administrator, Canadian Motor VehicleArbitration Plan, at the address or telephone number shownbelow.

*[HS08450(ALL)05/95] O & P Services

595 Bay Street — Suite 300

Toronto, Ontario

M5G 2C2

Telephone 1 (800) 207-0685

*[HS08500(ALL)06/95] This plan is not available in the province of Quebec.

File:cdhsz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:01 1996

184

*[HS08600(ALL)06/95] Getting Help Outside the U.S. and Canada

*[HS08700(ALL)06/95] Before you export your vehicle to a foreign country, contact theappropriate foreign embassy or consulate to make sure localregulations do not prevent you from registering your vehicle.Officials at the embassy can also help you decide whether youshould import your vehicle to that country.

*[HS08800(ALL)06/95] Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell you where to getunleaded fuel. If you cannot get unleaded fuel or can get onlyfuel with an anti-knock index that is lower than your vehicleneeds, contact a district or owner relations office before youleave the U.S. or Canada.

*[HS08900(ALL)06/95] Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without a proper conversionmay damage the effectiveness of your emissions control systemand may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. FordMotor Company is not responsible for any damage that iscaused by use of improper fuel.

*[HS09000(ALL)06/95] You may also have difficulty importing your vehicle back intothe U.S. if you use leaded fuel.

*[HS09100(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling orliving in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or theMiddle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If thedealership cannot help you, write to:

[HS09200(ALL)01/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0001307-C

File:cdhsz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:01 1996

Customer Assistance

185

*[HS09300(ALL)06/95] If you are in other foreign countries, contact the nearest Forddealership. If the dealership cannot help you, they can directyou to the appropriate Ford affiliate office.

*[HS09400(ALL)06/95] If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocateoutside of the U.S. or Canada, register your VehicleIdentification Number and new address with Ford MotorCompany Export Operations.

File:cdhsz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:03:01 1996

187

Accessories

*[AC00200(ALL)03/95] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle

*[AC00225(ALL)04/95] Ford has many fine products available from your dealer to cleanyour vehicle and protect its finishes. For best results, use thefollowing, or products of equivalent quality:

*[AC00250(ALL)05/95]

twelve pica

chart:0001433-A

*[AC00300(ALL)04/95] A wide selection of accessories is available through your localauthorized dealer. These fine accessories have been engineeredspecifically to fulfill your automotive needs. They are customdesigned to complement the style and aerodynamic appearanceof your Ford-built vehicle. In addition, each accessory is madefrom high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigidengineering and safety specifications. That is why Ford brandaccessories are warranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles(60,000 km), whichever comes first. See your dealer for completewarranty information and accessory availability.

File:cdacz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:02:40 1996

188

*[AC00350(ALL)03/95] Safety, Comfort, and Convenience

[AC00550(ALL)03/95]

fourteen pica

chart:0000608-L

[AC00575(ALL)05/95]

fourteen pica

chart:0001253-D

File:cdacz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:02:40 1996

Accessories

189

*[AC00600(ALL)01/95] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment, passengers, andluggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the totalweight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rearaxle (GVWR, GAWR as shown on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label). Consult your dealerfor specific weight information.

*[AC00700(ALL)05/95] NOTE: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) orthe Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) regulates the use of mobile communicationssystems — such as two-way radios, telephones, andtheft alarms — that are equipped with radiotransmitters. Any such equipment installed in yourvehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulationsand should be installed only by a qualified technician.

*[AC00800(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Mobile communications systems may harm theoperation of your vehicle, particularly if they are notproperly designed for automotive use or are notproperly installed. For example, when operated, suchsystems may cause the engine to stumble or stall. Inaddition, such systems may themselves be damaged ortheir operation affected by operating your vehicle.(Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers,and other transmitters whose power output is 5 wattsor less will not ordinarily affect your vehicle’soperation.)

*[AC00900(ALL)05/95] NOTE: Because we have no control over the installation,design, or manufacture of such systems, Ford cannotassume responsibility for any adverse effects ordamage that may result if you use this equipment.

File:cdacz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:02:40 1996

190

[AC01300( Z)05/95]

thirty-six pica

chart:0001481-A

File:cdacz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:02:40 1996

Accessories

191

[AC01350( Z)05/95]

thirty-six pica

chart:0001482-A

File:cdacz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:02:40 1996

192

[AC01400( Z)05/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:0001483-A

File:cdacz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:02:40 1996

Accessories

193

[AC01450( Z)05/95]

thirty-six pica

chart:0001484-A

File:cdacz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:02:40 1996

195

Servicing Your Mystique

%*[SV00300(ALL)03/95] Service Made Easy

*[SV00400(ALL)01/95] Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle.

*[SV00500(ALL)01/95] 1. When we can, we design parts that do not need to beserviced.

*[SV00600(ALL)01/95] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle as easy as possible.To help you:

*[SV00700(ALL)01/95] ■ We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow in the enginecompartment so that you can find them easily.

*[SV00800(ALL)01/95] ■ When possible, we design parts — such as the headlampbulbs — that can be replaced without tools.

*[SV00900(ALL)05/94] ■ We give you a Maintenance Schedule that makes trackingroutine service for your vehicle easy. The maintenanceschedule is located in the Maintenance Schedule and Recordbooklet.

*[SV01000(ALL)01/95] This chapter tells you about the basic parts that you need tocheck and service regularly.

*[SV01150(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle needs professional servicing, your dealership canprovide the parts and service required. Check your WarrantyInformation Booklet to find out which parts and services arecovered. Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of this OwnerGuide.

*[SV01250(ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that the Owner MaintenanceChecks listed in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet beperformed for the proper operation of your vehicle. In additionto the conditions listed in the Owner Maintenance Checklist, bealert for any unusual noise, vibration, or other indication thatyour vehicle may need service. If you do notice somethingunusual, see that your vehicle is serviced promptly.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

196

*[SV01275(ALL)03/95] Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids, and serviceparts conforming to Ford specifications. Motorcraft parts aredesigned and built to provide the best performance in yourvehicle. Using these parts for replacement is your assurance thatFord-built quality stays in your vehicle.

%*[SV01280(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in aresponsible manner. Follow your community’sstandards for disposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find out about recyclingautomotive fluids.

*[SV01600(ALL)03/95] Precautions When Servicing Your Vehicle

*[SV01700(ALL)01/95] Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle.Here are some general precautions for your safety:

%*[SV01800(ALL)03/95] ■ Do not work on a hot engine. The engine cooling fan maycome on unexpectedly. Always turn the engine off and let itcool.

*[SV01850(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The cooling fan is automatic and may come on at anytime. Always disconnect the negative terminal of thebattery before working near the fan.

*[SV01900(ALL)03/95] ■ If you must work with the engine running, avoid wearingloose clothing or jewelry that could get caught in movingparts. Take appropriate precautions with long hair.

*[SV02000(ALL)01/95] ■ Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosed space with theengine running, unless you are sure you have enoughventilation.

*[SV02100(ALL)01/95] ■ Never get under a vehicle while it is supported by a jackonly. If you must work under a vehicle, use safety stands.

*[SV02200(ALL)01/95] ■ Keep all lit cigarettes and other smoking materials awayfrom the battery and all fuel-related parts.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

197

*[SV02575(ALL)03/95] Working with the engine off:

[SV02625(ALL)02/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshiftis securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) or1 (First) gear (manual transaxle).

*[SV02650(ALL)03/95] 2. Remove the key from the ignition after you turn the engineoff.

*[SV02675(ALL)03/95] 3. Block the wheels. This will prevent your vehicle frommoving unexpectedly.

*[SV02700(ALL)03/95] Working with the engine on:

*[SV02825(ALL)04/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift issecurely latched in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) orNeutral (manual transaxle).

*[SV02850(ALL)03/95] 2. Block the wheels. This will prevent your vehicle frommoving unexpectedly.

*[SV03000(ALL)02/95] RWARNING

Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removedand do not remove it while the engine is running.

*[SV03050(ALL)03/95] If the battery is disconnected, the computer must relearn its idlecontrol. See Battery in the Index.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

198

*[SV03100(ALL)03/95] Opening the Hood

%*[SV03200(ALL)01/95] 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle locatedunder the bottom left corner of the instrument panel.

[SV03250(ALL)05/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0000375-KThe hood release under the instrument panel

%*[SV03300(ALL)02/95] 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latchthat is located under the hood at the center of the vehicle.

[SV03500( Z)05/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001477-AThe auxiliary latch under the front edge of the hood

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

199

[SV04000(ALL)05/94] 3. Lift the hood and secure it in the open position with theprop rod. Make sure only the hole in the hood marked inyellow is used.

[SV04100(ALL)02/89] When you close the hood, make sure the prop rod is in itsretainer and that the hood latches securely.

*[SV04201(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Apply lubricant to the hood latch at six-monthintervals to maintain smooth and trouble-freeoperation.

*[SV04301(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Read and understand Precautions When Servicing YourVehicle at the beginning of this chapter beforeopening the hood.

*[SV04500(ALL)04/95] Engine Compartment[SV05200(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle has a 4-cylinder 2.0L EFI or 6-cylinder 2.5L EFI

engine.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

200

[SV

05

50

0(A

LL)05

/95

]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

01

16

2-D

The

2.0LE

FIengine

File:cdsvz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing

Your

Mystique201

[SV

05

55

0(A

LL)05

/95

]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

01

16

3-D

The

2.5LE

FIengine

File:cdsvz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

202

*[SV05575(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Engine

*[SV05600(ALL)04/95] A clean engine is more efficient because a buildup of grease anddirt acts as an insulator, keeping the engine warmer than usual.

*[SV05625(ALL)05/95] ■ Extreme care must be used if a power washer is used toclean the engine. The high pressure fluid could penetratesealed parts and assemblies causing damage or malfunctions.

*[SV05650(ALL)04/95] ■ In order to avoid possible cracking of the engine block orfuel injection pump, do not spray a hot engine or injectionpump with cold water.

*[SV05675(ALL)06/95] ■ The alternator, distributor and air intake must be covered.Covering these components will help prevent water damage.

*[SV05700(ALL)04/95] ■ Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running. Watergetting into the engine may cause internal damage.

*[SV06100(ALL)03/95] Filling the Fuel Tank[SV06125(ALL)03/95] Fuel Filler Door Release (If equipped)

[SV06200(ALL)04/94] On some models, the fuel filler door cannot be opened fromoutside the vehicle. To unlatch the fuel filler door, find the frontend of the release handle on the floor to the left of the driver’sseat. Push the handle down firmly until it stops and the doorpops down.

[SV06275(ALL)05/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0000601-F

The fuel filler door release

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

203

[SV06300(ALL)01/95] If the fuel filler door does not open when you push the releasehandle, open the trunk and find the override release on theright side. The override release is a handle which is markedwith a fuel pump symbol. Open the fuel filler door by pullingon the handle.

[SV06340(ALL)04/94]

13-1/2 pica

art:0001019-C Fuel filler door release — manual override

*[SV06350(ALL)02/95] Filling the fuel tank

*[SV06375(ALL)05/95] The fuel door is outside the car on the passenger side near theback. To fill the fuel tank:

*[SV06400(ALL)05/95] 1. After opening the fuel filler door, remove the cap carefullyand slowly by turning it counterclockwise 1/2 to 3/4 turn. Ifa hissing sound is heard, wait until it stops, then continueturning until the cap is free.

*[SV06500(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If the fuel cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissingsound, wait until it stops before completely removing thecap.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

204

*[SV06550(ALL)05/95] 2. Put the nozzle all the way inside the fuel filler pipe beforepumping the fuel.

*[SV06625(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you spill any fuel on the body of your vehicle,clean it off immediately. The fuel may dull or softenthe paint if you do not wash it off.

[SV06650(ALL)05/95] 3. Replace the fuel cap completely when you are finished. Turnit clockwise until it is tight. It will click when it is fullytightened.

*[SV06675(ALL)05/95] 4. Push the fuel door closed.

*[SV06690(ALL)06/95] If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with an authorized Motorcraftor equivalent part.

%*[SV06700(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If you do not use the proper fuel cap, the pressure in thefuel tank can damage the fuel system or cause it to workimproperly in a collision.

*[SV06750(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with an aftermarket fuelfiller cap, the customer warranty may be void for anydamage to the fuel tank and/or fuel system.

%*[SV07500(ALL)05/95] Choosing the Right Fuel[SV07600(ALL)05/95] Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is

prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. The damagemay not be covered by your warranty.

[SV07650(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel containingmanganese-based additives such as MMT. Additionally, vehiclescertified to California emission standards (indicated on theunderhood Vehicle Emissions Control Information label) aredesigned to operate on California reformulated gasolines. IfCalifornia reformulated gasoline is not available when yourefuel, your vehicle can be operated on non-California fuels.However, even though your engine will perform adequately onother gasolines, the performance of the emission control devices

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

205

and systems may be adversely affected. Repair of damagecaused by using a fuel that your vehicle was not designed formay not be covered by your warranty.

*[SV07700(ALL)05/95] Octane recommendation

*[SV07750(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is designed to use regular gasoline with an(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. We do not recommend gasolineslabeled as “regular” in high altitude areas that are sold withoctane ratings of 86 or even less.

*[SV07800(ALL)06/95]

6 pica art:0040193-A

Typical octane rating label

*[SV07900(ALL)05/95] Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly.However, if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions onthe recommended octane fuel, see your dealer or a qualifiedservice technician to prevent any engine damage.

[SV09430(ALL)02/96] Fuel Quality

*[SV09450(ALL)05/95] If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitationproblems try a different brand of fuel. If the condition persists,see your dealer or a qualified service technician.

[SV09460(ALL)02/96] The American Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA)issued a gasoline specification to provide information on highquality fuels that optimize the performance of your vehicle. Werecommend the use of gasolines that meet the AAMAspecification if they are available.

[SV09470(ALL)02/96] It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products toyour fuel tank if you continue to use a high-quality fuel.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

206

*[SV09875(ALL)05/95] Cleaner air

*[SV09900(ALL)06/95] Ford recommends the use of gasolines to improve air quality,including reformulated gasolines, that contain oxygenates suchas a maximum of 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE. There should beno more than 5% methanol with cosolvents and additives toprotect the fuel system.

*[SV10185(ALL)06/95] Safety Information Relating to Automotive Fuels

*[SV10195(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death ifmisused or mishandled.

*[SV10300(ALL)05/95] ■ Turn vehicle off when refueling

*[SV10400(ALL)05/95] ■ Do not smoke when refueling. Fuels are extremelyflammable.

*[SV10500(ALL)05/95] ■ Do not siphon any fuel by mouth.

*[SV10600(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Gasoline or gasoline blended with methanol can causeblindness and possible death when swallowed. If anyfuel is swallowed, call a physician or poison controlcenter immediately.

*[SV10700(ALL)05/95] ■ Avoid breathing vapors while refueling.

*[SV10800(ALL)05/95] ■ If fuel is splashed on the skin, wash with soap and water.

*[SV10900(ALL)05/95] ■ If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (ifworn), flush with water for 15 minutes, and seek medicalattention.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

207

*[SV11000(ALL)05/95] Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain small amounts ofcarcinogens, such as benzene. Long-term exposure to unleadedgasoline vapors has caused cancer in laboratory animals.

*[SV11100(ALL)05/95] If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” or other forms ofdisulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism, vapor or skin contactwith a gasoline-methanol blend may cause the same kind ofadverse reaction as drinking an alcoholic beverage. In sensitiveindividuals, serious personal injury or sickness could result.Consult a physician promptly if you experience an adversereaction.

%*[SV11300(ALL)05/95] Running Out of Fuel

*[SV11325(ALL)05/95] NOTE: Avoid running out of fuel because this situation mayhave an adverse effect on modern powertraincomponents.

*[SV11550(ALL)05/95] You may need to crank the engine several times before the fuelsystem starts to pump fuel from the tank to the engine.

*[SV11580(ALL)01/95] RWARNING

Never pour fuel in the throttle body or attempt to startthe engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so couldresult in fire and personal injury.

%*[SV11600(ALL)05/95] Fuel Economy

*[SV11700(ALL)05/95] Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency of your vehicleand can be calculated as Miles Per Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per100 Kilometers (L/100K).

*[SV11725(ALL)05/95] Do not calculate fuel economy during your vehicle’s break-inperiod. This would not be an accurate estimate of how muchfuel your vehicle will normally use.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

208

*[SV11750(ALL)05/95] To calculate fuel economy:

*[SV11850(ALL)06/95] 1. Fill the tank completely and record the initial odometerreading.

*[SV11950(ALL)05/95] 2. Every time you buy fuel record the amount (in gallons orliters) purchased.

*[SV12150(ALL)05/95] 3. After at least three to five tankfuls, fill the fuel tank andrecord the final odometer reading.

*[SV12200(ALL)05/95] 4. Use these equations to calculate your fuel economy:

*[SV12250(ALL)05/95] ■ English: MPG U (total miles driven) V (gallons used)

*[SV12275(ALL)05/95] ■ Metric: L/100k U (liters used) V (100 kilometers)

%*[SV12300(ALL)05/95] Comparisons With EPA Fuel Economy Estimates

*[SV12400(ALL)05/95] EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from laboratory testsunder simulated road conditions and may not reflect the actualconditions you experience or your style of driving. The EPAfuel economy estimate is not a guarantee that you will achievethe fuel economy shown.

*[SV12610(ALL)05/95] The following decrease fuel economy:

*[SV12615(ALL)05/95] ■ Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance

*[SV12625(ALL)05/95] ■ Rapid acceleration and excessive speed

*[SV12630(ALL)05/95] ■ Driving with your foot on the brake

*[SV12635(ALL)05/95] ■ Sudden stops

*[SV12640(ALL)05/95] ■ Extended engine idling

*[SV12645(ALL)05/95] ■ Using speed control in hilly terrain

*[SV12650(ALL)05/95] ■ Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rear window defrosterand other accessories

*[SV12655(ALL)05/95] ■ Underinflated tires

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

209

*[SV12660(ALL)05/95] ■ Heavy loads

*[SV12665(ALL)05/95] ■ Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski or luggage racks, bugdeflectors, etc.

*[SV13510(ALL)02/95] Self-Service Pointers

*[SV13520(ALL)01/95] If you choose to do your own fueling, you should also performa few simple maintenance routines. This extra effort will saveyou additional money and contribute to the driving efficiency ofyour vehicle.

*[SV13530(ALL)01/95] The following procedures require only a tire gauge, a rag, an oilcan spout and windshield washer fluid.

*[SV13540(ALL)01/95] ■ Check the engine oil at every refueling stop

*[SV13550(ALL)01/95] ■ Clean the windshield, outside mirrors and headlights

*[SV13560(ALL)01/95] ■ Check windshield washer fluid

*[SV13570(ALL)02/95] ■ Check tires for excessive wear or worn edges

*[SV13580(ALL)01/95] ■ Check the tire pressure at least monthly

*[SV13600(ALL)03/95] Engine Oil Recommendations

*[SV13610(ALL)05/95] We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an equivalent oilmeeting Ford Specification ESE-M2C153-E and displaying theAmerican Petroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK on thefront of the container.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

210

*[SV13650(ALL)05/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001314-AThe API Certification Mark

*[SV13670(ALL)01/95] Never use:

*[SV13680(ALL)01/95] ■ “Non-Detergent” oils

*[SV13690(ALL)04/95] ■ Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG

%*[SV13700(ALL)01/95] ■ Additional engine oil additives, oil treatments or enginetreatments

[SV13710(ALL)04/95] Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity are PREFERRED foryour vehicle. They provide the best engine performance, fueleconomy and engine protection for all climates down to -15˚F(-25˚C).

%*[SV13770(ALL)03/95] Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and of the preferredviscosity may be used in your engine. The engine oil and oilfilter must still be changed according to the maintenanceschedule.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

211

*[SV13775(ALL)01/95] Checking and Adding Engine Oil

*[SV13800(ALL)03/95] Since the proper amount of engine oil is important for safeengine operation, check the oil using the dipstick each time youput fuel in your vehicle. Remember the engine must be off, theoil must be warm and the vehicle must be parked on levelground.

*[SV13900(ALL)04/95] Checking the engine oil level:

*[SV14000(ALL)02/95] 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed up and allow a fewminutes for the engine oil to drain back into the oil pan.

*[SV14050(ALL)05/94] 2. Set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshiftis securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) or1 (First) (manual transaxle).

*[SV14100(ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.

*[SV14200(ALL)03/95] 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted in yellow) andcarefully pull it out of the engine.

*[SV14300(ALL)01/95] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back into position, makingsure it is fully seated.

[SV14350(ALL)05/94]

6 pica art:0001305-A

Engine oil dipstick (2.0L engine)

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

212

[SV14400(ALL)05/94]

6 pica art:0001245-A

Engine oil dipstick (2.5L engine)

[SV14450(ALL)05/94] 6. 2.0L engine: Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If the oillevel is below the lower notch, add engine oil as necessary.If the oil level is beyond the upper notch, engine damageand/or high oil comsumption may occur and some oil mustbe removed from the engine.

[SV14500(ALL)05/95] 2.5L engine: Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If the oillevel is below the MIN line, add engine oil as necessary. Ifthe oil level is above the letter M in MAX, engine damageand/or high oil consumption may occur and some oil mustbe removed from the engine.

*[SV14600(ALL)01/95] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it is fully seated.

*[SV14800(ALL)01/95] It may be necessary to add some oil between oil changes. Makesure you use a CERTIFIED engine oil of the preferred viscosity.Your vehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply if enginedamage is caused by the use of improper engine oil.

*[SV15000(ALL)03/95] Add engine oil through the oil filler cap highlighted in yellow.To add oil, remove the filler cap and use a funnel to pour oilinto the opening. Be careful not to overfill the engine. Recheckthe oil level after you finish adding oil.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

213

*[SV16300(ALL)06/95] Changing the Engine Oil and the Oil Filter

[SV16400(ALL)03/95] Change the engine oil and oil filter per the following, whicheveroccurs first.

[SV16500(ALL)05/95]

twelve pica

chart:0001472-A

*[SV16600(ALL)04/95] Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record Booklet foradditional information.

%*[SV16700(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in aresponsible manner. Follow your community’sstandards for disposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find out about recyclingautomotive fluids.

*[SV17275(ALL)06/95] RWARNING

Continuous contact with USED motor oil has causedcancer in laboratory mice.

*[SV17290(ALL)05/95] Protect your skin by washing with soap and water.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

214

*[SV17300(ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant%*[SV17320(ALL)03/95] Checking the Engine Coolant

*[SV17350(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understand Precautions WhenServicing Your Vehicle at the beginning of this chapter.

*[SV17400(ALL)05/95]RWARNING

The cooling fan is automatic and may come on at anytime. Always disconnect the negative terminal of thebattery before working near the fan.

[SV17720(ALL)05/95]

13-1/2 pica

art:0000336-D The engine coolant recovery reservoir (2.5L shown — 2.0L similar)

%*[SV17825(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle’s coolant protects your engine from overheating inthe summer and from freezing in the winter. Check the level ofthe coolant at least once a month. Simply look at the enginecoolant reservoir located in the engine compartment. To locatethe reservoir, see the diagram of your vehicle’s engine underEngine Type, in this chapter.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

215

*[SV17850(ALL)01/95] Check the engine coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir atleast once a month using the following guidelines.

[SV17900(ALL)01/95] When your vehicle’s engine is cool, the coolant level in theengine coolant recovery reservoir should be at or above theMIN mark. When the engine is hot, the coolant level should beat the MAX mark. If the level is below the indicator mark ineither condition, coolant may need to be added.

*[SV18000(ALL)05/95] The coolant additives also protect the entire cooling system frominternal passageway corrosion and these additives lubricate thewater pump. The coolant should be serviced as noted in theMaintenance Schedule and Record booklet.

*[SV18100(ALL)01/95] Adding engine coolant

*[SV18200(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not put engine coolant in the container for thewindshield washer fluid.

*[SV18300(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never remove the coolant recovery cap while the engineis running or hot.

[SV18500(ALL)01/95] 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let itcool. Even when the engine is cool, be careful when youremove the coolant recovery cap.

[SV18600(ALL)05/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the capand turn it slowly counterclockwise to relieve the pressure.

*[SV18700(ALL)03/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases.

[SV18800(ALL)05/95] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released,use the cloth to turn and remove cap.

*[SV18900(ALL)02/95] 5. Stand away from the reservoir opening. Hot steam may blowout or hot engine coolant may even splash out.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

216

*[SV19000(ALL)01/95] RWARNING

Failure to follow these instructions could result in seriouspersonal injury from hot engine coolant or steamblowout and/or damage to the engine cooling system orengine.

*[SV19025(ALL)03/95] To find out how much engine coolant mixture your vehicle’scoolant system can hold, see Refill capacities for fluids in theIndex.

*[SV19100(ALL)01/95] Have your dealer check the engine cooling system for leaks ifyou have to add a quart (liter) of engine coolant more thanonce a month.

*[SV19102(ALL)06/95] Add engine coolant only to the recovery reservoir. If thecoolant level is low, add to the reservoir a 50/50 mixture ofwater and the type of engine coolant that Ford specifies. Youmay add water by itself only in an emergency, but you shouldreplace it with a 50/50 mixture as soon as possible. Check theengine coolant again the next few times you drive your vehicle.

*[SV19104(ALL)02/95] Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid is an optimized formulathat will protect all metals and rubber elastomers used in Fordengines for four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). It is notnecessary and not recommended to use supplemental coolantadditives in your vehicle. These additives may harm yourengine cooling system. Follow the recommended service intervalfor changing your engine coolant.

*[SV19106(ALL)04/94] NOTE: When you change or add engine coolant, it isimportant to maintain your engine coolantconcentration between 40% (-11˚F [-24˚C]) and 60%(-62˚F [-52˚C]), depending on your local climateconditions. Below 40% you will lose freeze protectionand above 60% your engine may overheat on a warmday.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

217

*[SV19108(ALL)03/95] NOTE: The use of an improper coolant may void yourwarranty for the engine cooling system. Use only apremium, nationally recognized brand name enginecoolant. Do not use alcohol, methanol antifreeze orengine coolant mixed with alcohol or methanolantifreeze. If you do not use the proper coolant, thealuminum engine on your vehicle will corrode.

*[SV19110(ALL)05/95] Ford Motor Company expressly authorizes the Ford Rotundaengine coolant recycling process and chemicals. Use only FordRotunda recycled engine coolant or an equivalent recycledengine coolant that is certified by the supplier to meet Fordspecification ESE-M97B44-A.

%*[SV19112(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in aresponsible manner. Follow your community’sstandards for disposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find out about recyclingautomotive fluids.

[SV19115(ALL)02/95] Use Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid or an equivalentengine coolant that meets Ford Specification ESE-M97B44-A.

*[SV20050(ALL)03/95] Battery

*[SV20100(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle may have a Motorcraft maintenance-free battery.The Motorcraft maintenance-free battery does not requireadditional water during its life of service. The vents are part ofthe cover and cannot be removed. For longer, trouble-freeoperation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, makecertain the battery cables are tightly fastened to the batteryterminals.

*[SV20150(ALL)02/95] If you see any corrosion on the battery cables or terminals,remove the cables from the terminal and clean them both with awire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution ofbaking soda and water. Reinstall the cables when you are donecleaning them, and apply a small quantity of grease to the topof each battery terminal to help prevent corrosion.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

218

[SV20200(ALL)02/95] Battery Replacement

*[SV20250(ALL)02/95] If your original equipment battery requires replacement (underwarranty), it may in some cases be replaced by a Motorcraftlow-maintenance battery. The low-maintenance battery hasremovable vent caps for checking the electrolyte level and foradding water, if needed.

*[SV20300(ALL)05/95] Check your battery’s electrolyte level, at least every 12 monthsor 12,000 miles (20,000 km), in temperatures above 90˚F (32˚C)and more often in temperatures above 90˚F (32˚C). Keep theelectrolyte in each cell up to the “level” indicator. Do notoverfill the battery cell.

*[SV20350(ALL)02/95] If the electrolyte level in your battery gets low, you can addplain tap water to the battery, as long as you don’t use hardwater, or water with a high mineral or alkali content. Ifpossible, however, try to only fill the battery cell with distilledwater. If the battery needs water often, have the chargingsystem checked.

*[SV20400(ALL)01/95] RWARNING

Batteries normally produce explosive gases which cancause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames,sparks or lit tobacco to come near the battery. Whencharging or working near a battery, always cover yourface and protect your eyes, and also provide ventilation.

%*[SV20450(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes,and clothing.

*[SV20475(ALL)06/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing,immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. Ifsomeone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milkor water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetableoil. Call a doctor immediately.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

219

%*[SV20500(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting abattery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with acarrier or with your hands on the opposite corners.

*[SV20550(ALL)03/95] Help Us Protect Our Environment

*[SV20600(ALL)04/95] Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that used lead-acidbatteries be returned to an authorized recycling facility fordisposal.

[SV20650(ALL)01/95]

6 pica art:0001223-A

Battery recycling symbol

[SV20660(ALL)06/95] Disconnecting the Battery

[SV20675(ALL)02/95] Because your vehicle engine is electronically controlled by acomputer, some control conditions are maintained by powerfrom the battery. If you ever disconnect the battery or install anew battery, you must allow the computer to “relearn” its idleconditions before your vehicle will drive properly. To begin thisprocess, put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transaxle) orNeutral (manual transaxle), set the emergency brake, turn off allthe accessories, and start the vehicle. Bring the engine to normaloperating temperature. Allow the manual transaxle to idle forone minute in Neutral. Allow the automatic transaxle engine toidle for one minute in N (Neutral) and one minute in D (Drive).Perform the previous procedure with the air conditioning (ifequipped) on and off (conditions permitting). The relearningprocess will complete automatically as you drive the vehicle.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

220

*[SV20700(ALL)03/95] If you do not let the engine relearn its idle, the idle quality ofyour vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle isrelearned. Your vehicle will eventually relearn its idle while youdrive it, but it takes much longer than if you use the previousprocedure.

*[SV21700(ALL)03/95] Windshield Washer Fluid and Wipers

*[SV21800(ALL)03/95] Washer Fluid

*[SV22100(ALL)01/95] Check the level of the windshield washer fluid every time youstop for fuel. The reservoir for washer fluid is located on thepassenger’s side of the engine compartment. Visual inspectioncan determine if the washer fluid is adequate. Do not operatethe washer when the reservoir is empty.

[SV22200(ALL)02/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001222-AThe windshield washer fluid reservoir

*[SV22300(ALL)03/95] Adding washer fluid

*[SV22400(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not put windshield washer fluid in the container forthe engine coolant.

[SV22450(ALL)05/95] If sprayed to clean the glass, engine coolant or antifreeze couldmake it difficult to see through the windshield.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

221

%*[SV22500(ALL)01/95] Use specially formulated windshield washer fluid rather thanplain water, because specially formulated washer fluids containadditives that dissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washerfluids containing an appropriate antifreeze such as methanolshould be used in freezing weather (temperatures below 32˚F[0˚C]). State or local regulations on Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC’s) may restrict use of the most common antifreeze,methanol. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreezeagents should be used only if they provide cold weatherprotection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiperblades, and windshield washer system.

*[SV23200(ALL)03/95] Wiper Blades

*[SV23300(ALL)03/95] Check the windshield wiper blades at least twice a year. Alsocheck them whenever they seem less effective than usual.Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments usedby commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiperblades.

*[SV23400(ALL)03/95] If the blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshieldand the wiper blades. Use undiluted windshield washer solutionor a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Do notuse fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents to clean yourwiper blades. These will damage your blades.

*[SV23500(ALL)03/95] To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simply turn theignition to the ACC position and turn your wipers on. Wait forthem to reach a vertical position and turn the ignition to theOFF position. Do not move the wipers manually. Manuallymoving the wipers across the windshield may damage them.

*[SV23600(ALL)03/01] Wiper blade replacement

*[SV23700( OZ)03/95] If the wiper blades still do not work properly after you cleanthem, you may need to replace the wiper blade assembly or theblade element. When replacing the wiper blade assembly, bladerefill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft part or equivalent.To replace the blades, follow the instructions that come withthem.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

222

[SV23716(ALL)11/94] Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement

*[SV23719(ALL)04/95] In your climate control system, you may have a filter that cleansthe air before it enters the interior of the vehicle. This filtershould be replaced at the intervals in the Maintenance Scheduleand Record booklet.

[SV23723(ALL)04/95] To replace the passenger compartment air filter:

[SV23726(ALL)02/95] 1. Remove both windshield wiper arms. With the wiper arm inthe horizontal position, lift the arm away from thewindshield while pulling the retaining clip at the basetoward the windshield. Release the wiper arm, then lift it offthe base.

[SV23730(ALL)07/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0001242-A

The screws on the grille

[SV23736(ALL)02/95] 2. Remove the plastic caps from the screws on the grille.Remove the screws.

[SV23741(ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Pull off the rubber weatherstrip at the backof the engine compartment. Remove the screws that hold thegrille, separate the two halves and remove the grille.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

223

[SV23746(ALL)11/93]

13-1/2 pica

art:0001243-A Removing the grille

[SV23751(ALL)07/94] 4. The filter is in a housing at the back of the enginecompartment, on the left side. Pull off the two clips on thesides of the housing. Slide out the housing and filter.

[SV23756(ALL)07/94]

13-1/2 pica

art:0001244-B Removing the passenger compartment air filter

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

224

[SV23761(ALL)07/94] 5. Slide the filter out of the housing, replace with the newfilter, and slide the housing and passenger compartment airfilter back into place. Reinstall the clips on the housing.

[SV23766(ALL)11/93] 6. Replace the grille and wiper arms.

*[SV23800(ALL)03/95] Tires

*[SV23900(ALL)03/95] Look at your tires each time you fill your fuel tank. If one tirelooks lower than the others, check the pressure in all of them.Always follow these precautions:

*[SV24200(ALL)03/95] ■ Keep your tires inflated to the recommended pressures.

*[SV24300(ALL)02/95] ■ Stay within the recommended load limits (see Load limits inthe Index).

*[SV24500(ALL)02/95] ■ Make sure the weight of your load is evenly distributed.

*[SV24550(ALL)10/89] ■ Drive at safe speeds.

*[SV24700(ALL)01/95] If you do not take these precautions, your tires may fail or goflat.

*[SV24750(ALL)06/95] Ford Motor Company recommends obeying posted speed limits.

*[SV24800(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility ofloss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds forextended periods of time may result in damage to vehiclecomponents.

[SV25000(ALL)02/95] At least once a month, check the pressure in all your vehicle’stires, including the spare. Use an accurate tire pressure gauge.Check the tire pressure when tires are cold (after the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than3 miles [5 km]). You can find the proper cold pressure and loadlimits of recommended size tires on the Tire Pressure Decal onthe left front door lock facing.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

225

*[SV25075(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling andcan fail suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehiclecontrol.

%*[SV25100(ALL)02/95] Tire Rotation

*[SV25200(ALL)04/95] Because your vehicle’s front and rear tires perform differentjobs, they often wear differently. To make sure your tires wearevenly and last longer, rotate them as indicated in the followingdiagram.

*[SV25300(ALL)04/95] Do not include the spare tire as part of your rotation.

[SV25350(ALL)02/95] If you notice that the tires wear unevely, have them checked.

[SV25400(ALL)02/94]

13-1/2 pica

art:0001224-A Rotating the tires

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

226

*[SV25700(ALL)04/95] Replacing the Tires

*[SV25900(ALL)05/95] Replace any tires that show wear bands. When your tire showsa wear band, it has only 1/16 inch (2 mm) of tread left.

[SV26150(ALL)05/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0001317-A

A worn-out tire

*[SV26175(ALL)01/95] Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly, you may needto replace them before a wear band appears across the entiretread. Some spots wear more heavily than others.

*[SV26300(ALL)01/95] RWARNING

When replacing full size tires, never mix radial,bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes thatare listed on the tire pressure decal. Make sure that alltires are the same size, speed rating, and load-carryingcapacity. Use only the tire combinations recommended onthe decal. If you do not follow these precautions, yourvehicle may not drive properly and safely.

*[SV26400(ALL)01/95] Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tiresmay also affect the accuracy of your speedometer.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

227

%*[SV27400(ALL)02/95] Information About Tire Quality Grades

*[SV27500(ALL)01/95] New vehicles are fitted with tires that have their Tire QualityGrade (described below) molded into the tire’s sidewall. TheseTire Quality Grades are determined by standards that theUnited States Department of Transportation has set.

*[SV27550(ALL)01/95] Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use onpassenger cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited productiontires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part575.104(c)(2).

*[SV27600(ALL)01/95] U.S. Department of Transportation — Tire quality grades: TheU.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you thefollowing information about tire grades exactly as thegovernment has written it.

%*[SV27799(ALL)01/95] Treadwear

*[SV27800(ALL)01/95] The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wearrate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. The relativeperformance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of theiruse, however, and may depart significantly from the norm dueto variations in driving habits, service practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

*[SV27999(ALL)01/95] Traction A B C

*[SV28000(ALL)01/95] The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and C,and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may havepoor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests anddoes not include cornering (turning) traction.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

228

*[SV28299(ALL)01/95] Temperature A B C

*[SV28300(ALL)01/95] The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance which all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that isproperly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

%*[SV28500(ALL)04/95] Snow Tires and Chains

*[SV28601(ALL)06/93] During the winter months in some climates, you may need touse snow tires and occasionally chains for your tires.

*[SV28700(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tiresyou currently have on your vehicle.

*[SV28750(ALL)02/95] Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or if the lawrequires them where you live. If you choose to use chains onyour vehicle’s tires, be aware of the following:

*[SV28801(ALL)11/94] ■ Tire chains may scratch or chip aluminum wheels. IT ISRECOMMENDED THAT TIRE CHAINS ARE INSTALLEDON STEEL WHEELS ONLY. Be sure to remove wheelcovers (if equipped) from steel rims before using tire chainsto avoid scratches or damage.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

229

[SV28876(ALL)04/94] ■ Tire chains cannot be fitted with 205/60R tires.

*[SV28901(ALL)11/94] ■ Local regulations may prohibit or restrict the use of tirechains. Investigate the laws and regulations in your areabefore installing chains.

*[SV28950(ALL)05/95] ■ Put the chains on the front tires tightly with the ends helddown securely. Retighten the chains after driving 1/2 mile(1 km). Follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions.

*[SV29001(ALL)05/95] ■ Do not drive faster than 30 mph (50 km/h) or the chainmanufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever islower. Avoid bumps, holes and sharp turns. If you can hearthe chains rub or bang against your vehicle, remove thechains to prevent damage to your vehicle.

*[SV29050(ALL)11/94] ■ Tire chains may affect vehicle handling. Drive carefully andavoid hard braking.

*[SV29101(ALL)11/94] ■ Do not use chains on temporary spare tires. They maydamage the vehicle and the tire.

*[SV29151(ALL)05/94] ■ Remove tire chains at the first opportunity after using themon snow and ice. Do not use the chains on dry roads.

%*[SV29200(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Wheels

*[SV29225(ALL)05/95] Wash the wheels with the same detergent you use to wash yourvehicle’s body. Do not use acid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool,abrasives, fuel, or strong detergents. These substances willdamage protective coatings. Use tar and road oil remover toremove grease and tar.

*[SV29250(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out if the brushes areabrasive.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

230

*[SV29300(ALL)03/01] Automatic Transaxle Fluid

*[SV29310(ALL)03/95] Under normal circumstances, you do not need to check the fluidlevel of the transaxle, since your vehicle does not use uptransaxle fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Recordbooklet for replacement intervals. However, if the transaxle isnot working properly — for instance, the transaxle may slip orshift slowly, or you may notice some sign of fluid leakage —the fluid level should be checked.

%*[SV29340(ALL)02/93] Checking the Automatic Transaxle Fluid

*[SV29350(ALL)01/95] With the vehicle on a level surface and the brake fully applied,start the engine and move the gear shift selector through all ofthe gears allowing sufficient time for each position to engage.Securely latch the gear shift selector in the P (Park) position.Fully set the parking brake and leave the engine running.

*[SV29370(ALL)01/95] Wipe off the dipstick cap and pull the dipstick out. Wipe theindicator end clean. Put the dipstick back into the filler tube andmake sure it is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and read thefluid level.

*[SV29372(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Your vehicle should not be driven until some fluidhas been added if the fluid level is below the bottomdimple on the dipstick and the outside temperature isabove 50˚F (10˚C). Add only enough fluid to bring thelevel above the bottom hole.

*[SV29376(ALL)02/95] If the vehicle has not been driven and the fluid level is abovethe bottom dimple on the dipstick, do not add fluid. Recheckthe fluid level after your vehicle has reached normal operatingtemperature.

*[SV29378(ALL)05/95] Normal operating temperature is reached after drivingapproximately 20 miles (30 km). The fluid level should bewithin the crosshatched area on the dipstick.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

231

*[SV29380(ALL)01/95] NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for an extendedperiod at high speeds, driven in city traffic during hotweather, or has been pulling a trailer, the vehicleshould be turned off for about 30 minutes to allowthe fluid to cool before checking.

[SV29382(ALL)05/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001226-AAutomatic transaxle fluid dipstick

%*[SV29400(ALL)01/95] Adding Automatic Transaxle Fluid

*[SV29410(ALL)01/95] Before adding any fluid, be sure that the correct type will beused. Correct type is shown on the dipstick.

*[SV29420(ALL)03/95] Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments through the filler tubeto bring the level to the correct area on the dipstick. DO NOTOVERFILL. If the level is above the top hole on the dipstick,excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician.

%*[SV29425(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in aresponsible manner. Follow your community’sstandards for disposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find out about recyclingautomotive fluids.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

232

[SV29800(ALL)02/95] Manual Transaxle Fluid[SV29900(ALL)05/94] The lubricant level and quality should not deteriorate under

normal driving conditions. However, you should have the fluidlevel checked occasionally. If lubricant is required, see LubricantSpecifications in this chapter.

*[SV30200(ALL)03/95] Brake Fluid

*[SV30300(ALL)04/95] Under normal circumstances, your vehicle should not use upbrake fluid rapidly. However, expect the level of the brake fluidto slowly fall as you put more mileage on your vehicle and thebrake lining wears.

[SV30401(ALL)02/94] You should check the brake fluid at every scheduled engine oilchange, but be sure to check it at least once a year. You can dothis by looking at the fluid level in the plastic reservoir on themaster cylinder. (See The Engine Types in this chapter to locatethe brake fluid reservoir.) The fluid level should be at or nearthe MAX mark.

*[SV30450(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Brake fluid is toxic.

*[SV30475(ALL)06/95] If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If takeninternally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medicalattention immediately.

*[SV30500(ALL)03/95] If the fluid is low, carefully clean and remove the cap from thereservoir. Fill the reservoir to the MAX line with Ford HighPerformance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AA or equivalentDOT 3 fluid meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

233

*[SV30800(ALL)01/95] RWARNING

If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you willcause permanent damage to your brakes.

*[SV30900(ALL)01/95] Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line.

*[SV31000(ALL)01/95] If you find that the fluid level is excessively low — below theseam or ridge on the outside of the plastic reservoir — have thebrake system inspected.

*[SV31100(ALL)01/95] RWARNING

Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry.This may cause the brakes to fail.

[SV31130(ALL)02/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0000671-BThe brake fluid reservoir

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

234

*[SV31200(ALL)03/95] Power Steering Fluid

*[SV31225(ALL)03/95] Checking and Adding Power Steering Fluid

[SV31250(ALL)05/94] With the power steering system at operating temperature,switch off the engine. The fluid level should be up to the MAXmarking on the transparent reservoir.

[SV31275(ALL)05/94] If it drops to or below the MIN mark, top off with the specifiedfluid.

[SV31350(ALL)05/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001260-AThe power steering fluid reservoir

[SV32000(ALL)05/95] Use only power steering fluid that meets Ford’s SpecificationESW-M2C33-F or is an equivalent Type F AutomaticTransmission Fluid with a Ford registration number (an 8-digitnumber beginning with “2P” printed on the fluid container).

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

235

% [SV33101(ALL)01/95] Fuses, Circuit Breakers and Relays[SV33200(ALL)05/94] Fuses, circuit breakers, and relays protect your vehicle’s

electrical system from overloading. If electrical parts in yourvehicle are not working, the system may have been overloadedand blown a fuse or relay, or tripped a circuit breaker. Beforeyou replace or repair any electrical parts, check the appropriatecircuit protector.

[SV33400(ALL)05/94] The following charts tell you which circuit protector protectseach electrical part of your vehicle. If a fuse blows or a circuitbreaker opens a circuit, all the parts of your vehicle that use thecircuit will not work.

*[SV33410(ALL)06/95] Once you have determined which fuses or circuit breakers tocheck, follow the procedures under Checking and replacing fusesor Checking and replacing circuit breakers later in this chapter.

*[SV33500(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Always remove the key from the ignition before workingon or replacing fuses.

[SV33600(ALL)01/95] The Power Distribution Box Fuses and Relays

[SV33710(ALL)02/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001227-AThe power distribution box location

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

236

[SV33713(ALL)02/94]

24 pica art:0001228-A

The power distribution box fuses and relays

[SV33800(ALL)09/94] Spare fuses are located in the power distribution box under thehood.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

237

[SV33920(ALL)05/95]

twenty-four pica

chart:0000378-J

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

238

[SV33930(ALL)05/94]

fourteen pica

chart:0001257-B

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

239

*[SV33951(ALL)02/95] The Instrument Panel Fuses, Circuit Breakers andRelays

[SV33971(ALL)05/94] The instrument panel fuse panel is underneath the instrumentpanel on the left side. To open it, reach under the instrumentpanel and push the release button to the right of the fuse panel.

[SV34050( Z)05/94]

13-1/2 pica

art:0001309-A The instrument panel fuse panel location

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

240

[SV34101(ALL)02/94]

24 pica art:0000381-C

The instrument panel fuses

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

241

[SV34210(ALL)05/94]

thirty pica

chart:0000379-J

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

242

[SV34401(ALL)01/95] Relays Outside the Fuse Boxes

[SV34501(ALL)04/94]

sixteen pica

chart:0001229-A

%*[SV35200(ALL)06/95] Checking and Replacing Fuses

[SV35301(ALL)04/94] 1. Use the charts to decide which fuse you should check.

[SV35311(ALL)02/94] 2. On the fuse panel decal located on the cover of the powerdistribution box or on the end of the instrument panel fusepanel, find the number of the fuse you want to check.

[SV35351(ALL)02/94] 3. Find the corresponding fuse and remove it with the fusepulling tool that is provided.

[SV35370(ALL)11/92] 4. Check the fuse to see if it is blown. Look through the clearside of the fuse to see if the metal wire inside is separated. Ifit is, the fuse should be replaced.

[SV35390(ALL)02/93] 5. Replace the fuse with one that has the right amperage rating.See the following chart.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

243

[SV36000(ALL)05/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0001319-A

The side view of a typical fuse

[SV36200(ALL)04/94]

eight pica

chart:0001255-B

*[SV36300(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Always replace a fuse with one that has the specifiedamperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperagerating can cause severe wire damage and could start afire.

%*[SV36700(ALL)03/95] Circuit Breakers

[SV36900(ALL)02/94] If you need to check a circuit breaker that is on the instrumentpanel fuse panel, see Checking and replacing fuses to find out howto locate the fuse panel and pull it down.

*[SV37000(ALL)02/95] Diagnostic equipment is needed to check circuit breakers. Referto the manufacturer’s instructions.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

244

[SV37100(ALL)02/95] Circuit breakers will reset themselves and allow the electricalparts to work again once the overload on the circuit is gone. Ifthe circuit breakers continue to cut off electricity, have yourvehicle’s electrical system checked.

*[SV37200(ALL)02/95] If you replace a circuit breaker, use one with the sameamperage rating. To remove a circuit breaker mounted in thefuse panel, grip it with your finger and thumb and pull itstraight out of its socket.

*[SV37500(ALL)03/95] Lights and Bulb Replacement

*[SV37600(ALL)01/95] It is a good idea to check the operation of the following lightsfrequently:

*[SV37700(ALL)01/95] ■ headlamps

*[SV37800(ALL)01/95] ■ tail lamps

*[SV37900(ALL)01/95] ■ brakelamps

*[SV37950(ALL)02/95] ■ high-mount brakelamp

*[SV38000(ALL)01/95] ■ hazard flasher

*[SV38100(ALL)01/95] ■ turn signals

*[SV38200(ALL)01/95] ■ side markers

*[SV38300(ALL)01/95] ■ license plate lamp

%*[SV38400(ALL)01/95] The alignment of your headlamps should be checked if:

*[SV38500(ALL)01/95] ■ oncoming motorists frequently signal you to turn off yourvehicle’s high beams when you do not have the high beamson

*[SV38600(ALL)01/95] ■ the headlamps do not seem to give you enough light to seeclearly at night

*[SV38700(ALL)11/92] ■ the headlamps are not aligned so that they point slightlydown and to the right.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

245

*[SV38800(ALL)03/95] Headlamp Bulb

[SV38900(ALL)05/94] The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceable bulbs, one forhigh beam and one for low beam on each side. When the lampburns out, simply replace the bulb, rather than the whole lamp.

*[SV39000(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep outof children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plasticbase and do not touch the glass. The oil from your handcould cause the bulb to break the next time theheadlamps are operated.

*[SV39100(ALL)01/95] Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless you can immediatelyreplace it with a new one. If a bulb is removed for an extendedperiod of time, contaminants may enter the headlamp housingand affect its performance.

*[SV39300(ALL)03/95] Removing the headlamp bulb

*[SV39400(ALL)05/95] 1. Make sure that the headlamp knob is in the OFF position.

*[SV39500(ALL)02/95] 2. Lift the hood and find the bulb in the headlamp socket.

[SV39850(ALL)04/94] 3. Remove the bulb assembly by turning it clockwise andpulling it out of the headlamp socket.

[SV40050(ALL)04/94] 4. Remove the L-shaped bulb by pressing the retaining clip atthe base of the electrical connector and sliding the bulb out.

*[SV40300(ALL)03/95] Installing the headlamp bulb

[SV40450(ALL)04/94] 1. Without touching the glass on the bulb, insert the new bulb.You may want to protect the bulb by holding it with a pieceof cloth or paper towel. Make sure the retaining clip at thebase of the electrical connector locks.

[SV40550(ALL)04/94] 2. Insert the bulb assembly in the headlamp socket. Turn itcounterclockwise to lock it in place.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

246

[SV40700(ALL)04/94] 3. Turn the headlamps on and make sure that they workproperly. If the headlamp was correctly aligned before youchanged the bulb, you should not need to align it again.

*[SV40750(ALL)02/95] High-Mount Brakelamp Bulbs

[SV40841(ALL)02/94] From the back seat, remove the back of the brakelampassembly. Depress the two retaining tabs on the ends of theassembly and pull off the back.

[SV40843(ALL)02/94] Turn the burned-out bulb counterclockwise and pull it out. Pushin the replacement bulb and turn it clockwise to lock it in thesocket. Replace the back of the brakelamp assembly, makingsure that the retaining tabs snap into place.

[SV40848(ALL)02/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0000624-BThe high-mount brakelamp assembly

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

247

[SV40900(ALL)05/95] Using the Right Bulbs

[SV40980( Z)07/94]

thirty-two pica

chart:0001345-A

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

248

*[SV41000(ALL)03/95] Emission Control System

*[SV41100(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter whichenables your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emissionrequirements.

*[SV41200(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Exhaust leaks may result in the entry of harmful andpotentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.Under extreme conditions excessive exhaust temperaturescould damage the fuel system, the interior floor covering,or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.

*[SV41300(ALL)05/95] To make sure that the catalytic converter and the other emissioncontrol parts continue to work properly:

*[SV41400(ALL)01/95] ■ Use only unleaded fuel.

*[SV41500(ALL)01/95] ■ Avoid running out of fuel.

*[SV41600(ALL)01/95] ■ Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving,especially at high speeds.

*[SV41700(ALL)03/95] ■ Have the services listed in the Maintenance Schedule andRecord booklet performed according to the specified schedule.The scheduled maintenance services are required becausethey are considered essential to the life and performance ofyour vehicle and to its emissions system.

*[SV41720(ALL)05/95] Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine Ford replacementparts. If other than Ford or Motorcraft parts or Ford authorizedremanufactured parts are used for maintenance replacements orfor the service of components affecting emission control, suchnon-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford MotorCompany parts in performance and durability. It is the owner’sresponsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts. Pleaseconsult your warranty booklet for complete warrantyinformation.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

249

*[SV41800(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass orother dry ground cover. The emission system heats upthe engine compartment and exhaust system, which canstart a fire.

*[SV41900(ALL)05/95] Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, loss of oil pressure,the charge warning light, the check engine light, or thetemperature warning light. These sometimes indicate that theemission system is not working properly.

*[SV42000(ALL)01/95] Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle orengine. Changes that cause more unburned fuel to reach theexhaust system can increase the temperature of the engine orexhaust system.

*[SV42100(ALL)01/95] By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases,trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles is not permittedto intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent itfrom working. In some of the United States and in Canada,vehicle owners may be liable if their emission control device isremoved or is prevented from working.

*[SV42300(ALL)01/95] Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operate properly. Seeyour dealer if the engine runs on for more than five secondsafter you shut it off or if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires.

%*[SV42400(ALL)05/95] Information about your vehicle’s emission control system is onthe Vehicle Emission Control Information decal located on ornear the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement andgives some tune-up specifications.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

250

%*[SV42425(ALL)06/95] Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance Testing

*[SV42450(ALL)06/95] In some localities it may become a legal requirement to pass anInspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the On-Board Diagnostic(OBD) II system. If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its batteryhas just been serviced, the OBD II system is reset to a not readyfor I/M testing condition. To prepare for I/M testing, the lawspecifies a “need for additional mixed city and highway drivingto complete the check” of the OBD II system. As soon as all ofthe OBD II system checks are successfully completed, the OBDII system is set to the ready condition. The amount of drivingrequired to reach the ready condition varies with individualdriving patterns. To complete this requirement in the minimumamount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycle defined below.If the vehicle owner cannot or does not want to do theadditional driving required by law, a service center can performthis drive cycle as it would any other type of repair work.

*[SV42475(ALL)06/95] OBD II Drive Cycle

*[SV42501(ALL)06/95] The following steps must be run in the order shown. If anysteps are interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safedriving mode is acceptable between steps.

*[SV42550(ALL)06/95] Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to trafficconditions and obey all traffic laws.

*[SV42560(ALL)05/95] The engine must be warmed up and at operating temperaturebefore proceeding with the drive modes of the following OBD IIDrive Cycle.

*[SV42575(ALL)05/95] 1. Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral) the vehicle for4 minutes.

[SV42601(ALL)05/95] 2. Idle the vehicle in Drive (Neutral for manual transaxle) for40 seconds.

*[SV42610(ALL)06/95] 3. Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (70 km/h) at 1/4 to 1/2throttle for 10 seconds.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

251

*[SV42620(ALL)06/95] 4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at 45 mph(70 km/h) for 30 seconds.

*[SV42631(ALL)05/95] 5. Idle the vehicle in Drive (Neutral for manual transmissions)for 40 seconds.

*[SV42635(ALL)06/95] 6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic at speedsbetween 25 and 40 mph (40-60 km/h) for 15 minutes.During the 15 minute drive cycle the following modes mustbe achieved:

*[SV42641(ALL)06/95] a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10 seconds each

*[SV42645(ALL)06/95] b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle position, and

*[SV42650(ALL)06/95] c. choose 3 different speeds to do 1.5 minute steady statethrottle drives.

*[SV42655(ALL)06/95] 7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and 60 mph(70-100 km/h). This should take approximately 5 minutes.

*[SV42661(ALL)06/95] 8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady at the selectedspeed between 45 and 60 mph (70-100 km/h) forapproximately 5 minutes.

*[SV42665(ALL)06/95] 9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varying speeds between45 and 60 mph (70-100 km/h).

*[SV42670(ALL)06/95] 10.Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in Drive for 40 seconds.

*[SV42725(ALL)06/95] 11.OBD II drive cycle has been completed. Vehicle can beturned off when convenient.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

252

*[SV42751(ALL)03/95] Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts, andLubricant Specifications

*[SV42775(ALL)03/95] Refill Capacities

[SV42801(ALL)05/95]

sixteen pica

chart:0000386-Q

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

253

*[SV42850(ALL)05/95] Motorcraft Parts

[SV42900(ALL)05/95]

sixteen pica

chart:0000385-M

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

254

*[SV42980(ALL)03/95] Lubricant Specifications

[SV43200(ALL)05/95]

twenty-six pica

chart:0000722-P

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

255

*[SV44000(ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage

*[SV44100(ALL)01/95] Maintenance Tips

*[SV44150(ALL)01/95] If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period oftime (60 days or more), refer to the following maintenancerecommendations to ensure your vehicle stays in good operatingcondition.

*[SV44200(ALL)01/95] General

*[SV44300(ALL)01/95] ■ Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.

*[SV44400(ALL)01/95] ■ Protect from sunlight, if possible.

*[SV44500(ALL)01/95] ■ If vehicles are stored outside, they require regularmaintenance to protect against rust and damage.

*[SV44600(ALL)01/95] Body

*[SV44700(ALL)01/95] ■ Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar ormud from exterior surfaces, rear wheel housing andunderside of front fenders.

*[SV44800(ALL)01/95] ■ Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.

*[SV44900(ALL)01/95] ■ Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.

*[SV45000(ALL)01/95] ■ Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat ofauto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary whenthe vehicle is washed.

*[SV45100(ALL)04/95] ■ Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges and latcheswith a light grade oil.

*[SV45200(ALL)01/95] ■ Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading.

*[SV45300(ALL)01/95] ■ Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

256

%*[SV45350(ALL)01/95] Engine

*[SV45400(ALL)01/95] ■ Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reachesnormal operating temperature.

*[SV45500(ALL)01/95] ■ With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gearswhile the engine is running.

%*[SV45600(ALL)01/95] Fuel system

%*[SV45700(ALL)07/94] ■ Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fuel until the firstautomatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle.

*[SV45900(ALL)03/95] NOTE: During extended periods of vehicle storage (60 days ormore), fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. This candamage rubber and other polymers in the fuel systemand may also clog small orifices.

*[SV46000(ALL)01/95] Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added whenever actual orexpected storage periods exceed 60 days. Follow the instructionson the label. The vehicle should then be operated at idle speedto circulate the additive throughout the fuel system.

*[SV46100(ALL)01/95] A volatile corrosion inhibitor added to the fuel system willprotect the fuel system’s inner surfaces from corrosion. Followthe instructions packaged with the product.

%*[SV46200(ALL)01/95] Cooling system

*[SV46300(ALL)01/95] ■ Protect against freezing temperatures.

%*[SV46400(ALL)01/95] Battery

*[SV46500(ALL)01/95] ■ Check and recharge as necessary.

*[SV46600(ALL)01/95] ■ Keep connections clean and covered with a light coat ofgrease.

*[SV46650(ALL)03/95] ■ If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days withoutrecharging the battery, it may be advisable to disconnect thebattery cables to ensure battery charge is maintained forquick starting.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

Servicing Your Mystique

257

%*[SV46700(ALL)01/95] Brakes

*[SV46800(ALL)01/95] ■ Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.

%*[SV46900(ALL)01/95] Tires

*[SV47000(ALL)05/95] ■ Maintain recommended air pressure.

*[SV47100(ALL)01/95] Miscellaneous

*[SV47200(ALL)01/95] ■ Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and clevis pins undervehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust.

*[SV47300(ALL)05/95] ■ Move vehicles at least 25 feet (10 m) every 15 days tolubricate working parts to prevent corrosion.

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

258

*[SV99950( Z)05/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:MERCADVIL

File:cdsvz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 11:01:54 1996

263

[QI00500(ALL)05/95]

33-1/2 pica

art:0001473-A

Warning label locations

File:cdqiz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:59:10 1996

264

[QI0

07

00

(Z

)05

/95

]

33-1

/2pica

art:0001164-E

FrontE

xteriorV

iew

File:cdqiz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 10:59:10 1996

265

[QI0

09

00

(Z

)05

/95

]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

01

16

5-D

Rear

Exterior

View

File:cdqiz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 10:59:10 1996

266

[QI0

11

00

(Z

)05

/95

]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

01

16

6-D

Entrance

View

File:cdqiz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 10:59:10 1996

267

[QI0

13

00

(Z

)05

/95

]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

01

16

7-B

Driver’s

Door

File:cdqiz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 10:59:10 1996

268

[QI0

15

00

(Z

)05

/95

]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

01

16

8-C

Instrument

Panel

File:cdqiz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 10:59:10 1996

269

[QI0

17

00

(Z

)05

/95

]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

01

17

4-C

SportInstrum

entC

luster

File:cdqiz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 10:59:10 1996

270

[QI0

19

00

(Z

)05

/95

]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

01

17

0-C

Trunk

File:cdqiz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 10:59:10 1996

271

[QI0

21

00

(Z

)05

/95

]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

01

30

3-C

The

2.0LE

ngineC

ompartm

ent

File:cdqiz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 10:59:10 1996

272

[QI0

23

00

(Z

)05

/95

]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

01

30

4-C

The

2.5LE

ngineC

ompartm

ent

File:cdqiz.ex

Upd

ate:Fri Feb 23 10:59:10 1996

INDEX

273

AABS warning light (see Anti-lock brake system) . . . . . . 65Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Air bag supplemental restraint system

and child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 25description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 20disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 20indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20passenger air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20proper seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23wearing safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Air cleaner filterlocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Alarm, activating remote personal. . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Antenna, radio (see Electronic sound system). . . . . . . 134Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Anti-lock brake system (ABS), warning light . . . . . . . . 65Anti-theft lug nuts and key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Appeals (see Dispute settlement board) . . . . . . . . . 178Assistance (see Customer assistance). . . . . . . . . . . 175Audio system (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . 113Automatic transaxle

driving with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231fluid, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252fluid, specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

274

Axlelubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

BBacking up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 144Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Battery

acid, treating emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 218charging system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163how to service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217jumping a disabled battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159maintenance-free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217proper disposal, recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219replacement, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Brake fluidbrake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56checking and adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Brakelamp, high-mount brakelamp . . . . . . . . . . . 246Brakes

anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light . . . . . . . 65applying the brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232new brake linings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Brake-shift interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

275

Brights (high beams) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 82Bulbs, replacing

halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245high-mount brakelamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

CCanada, customer assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Canada, warranty information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) . . . 183Capacities for refilling fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Car seats for children (see Child safety seats) . . . . . . . 25Cassette tape player (see Electronic sound system) . . . . 132Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Chains, tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Charging system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Child safety restraints

child safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Child safety seatsand air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 25attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . . . . . . . . 25in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28tether anchorage hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Chimeheadlamps on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Circuit breakers, checking and replacing . . . . . . . . . 243Cleaning your vehicle

CD player and discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123chrome and aluminum parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6exterior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

276

Cleaning your vehicle (continued)exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5rear windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76upholstery and interior trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Clutchoperation while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Cold engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Combination lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Compact disc player (see Electronic sound system) . . . . 114Compact disc radio (see Electronic sound system) . . . . 114Console, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Controls

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105steering column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Coolant (see Engine coolant)checking and adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

277

Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Crankcase emission filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Cruise control (see Speed control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Customer Assistance Centre, Ford of Canada. . . . . . . 182

DDashboard (see Instrument panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Daytime running light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Defrost, rear window and side view mirrors . . . . . . . . 74Dipstick

automatic transaxle fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Disabled vehicle (see Towing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Dispute Settlement Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Driving under special conditions

bad weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153high water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153slippery roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151tips for safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

EElectrical system

circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 242relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Electronic sound systemradio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134tuning the radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 129warranty and service information . . . . . . . . . . . 135

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

278

Electronic stereo cassette radio(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . . . . 128

Electronic stereo radio (see Electronic sound system) . . . 128Emergencies, roadside

assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175battery acid spills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 219jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Emergency brake (parking brake) . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Emission control system

catalytic converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248emissions warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 248

Enginecheck engine warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60does not start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47fuel injected engine, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 45fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50preparing to start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252service points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Engine coolant

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217low coolant warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256recovery reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 214refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 63description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Engine fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

279

Engine oil“break-in” oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4changing oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213checking and adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 57filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Entry system, illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Exhaust fumes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

FFlashers, hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Flashing the lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Fluid refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Ford Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Ford Extended Service Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ford of Canada Customer Assistance Centre . . . . . . . 182Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184French owner guides, how to obtain. . . . . . . . . . . . 3Fuel

calculating fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252choosing the right fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates. . . . . 208filling your vehicle with fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

280

Fuel (continued)safety information relating to automotive fuels. . . . . 206storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256treating emergencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Fuel capremoving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Fuel filler door, remote release . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Fuel pump shut-off switch

engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Fuse panels, instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Fuses

charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 241checking and replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

GGas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Gasoline (see Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Gauges, Mechanical

engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 63fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

281

Gearshiftautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137column-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137floor-mounted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143locking the gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143shift-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Gearshift: shifting the gears. . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 143GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

HHazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Headlamps

aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244checking alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76daytime running lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244turning on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75warning chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99High beams

indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 82

High-mount brakelampdescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246replacing the bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

282

Hoodlatch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198lubrication specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198working under the hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

IIdentification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . . . . . . . 177, 182Idle

relearning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Ignitionchime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41removing the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Indicator lights and chimes (see Lights) . . . . . . . . . . 67Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Instrument panel

lighting up panel and interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77location of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

JJack

operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Jump-starting your vehicleattaching cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161disconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

KKeys

key in ignition chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41removing from the ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42stuck in lock position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

283

LLamps

checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244daytime running light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77dome lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77flashing the lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75high beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82high-mount brakelamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92instrument panel, dimming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) . . . . . . . . . . 81Lap belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Lights, warning and indicator

air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59anti-lock brakes (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56charging system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57hazard warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58low coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55turn signal indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 81

Load limitsGAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Lubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

284

Lug nutsanti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

MMaintenance (see Servicing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Manual transaxle

backing up (reverse). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143shifting gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Master cylinder, brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Mileage, calculating fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . 207Mirrors

side view mirrors (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Motorcraft parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

NNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration . . . . . 181New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

OOdometer

trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system . . . . . . . . . . 250Overseas offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

285

PPanic alarm feature, remote entry system . . . . . . . . . 94Parking brake

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253PCV valve, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Power features

door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Power steeringdipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234driving with power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147fluid, checking and adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234fluid, refill capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Prop rod, hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

RRadio (see Electronic sound systems) . . . . . . . . . . 113Rear axle, refill capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Refill capacities for fluids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Remote entry system

locking/unlocking doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93opening the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93panic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94replacement/additional transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . 95replacing the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

286

Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints)adult. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

SSafe driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Safety belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Safety chains, when towing a trailer. . . . . . . . . . . 156Safety Compliance Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . 153Safety defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Safety information relating to automotive fuels . . . . . . 206Safety restraints

adjusting the safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 14cleaning the safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16dual locking mode retractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11extension assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14for adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7for children. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9lap belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15proper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15warning light and chime. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Safety seats for childrenand air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 25attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25in rear outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28in rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25tether anchorage hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

287

Seat belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Seats

adjusting the seat, manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100adjusting the seats, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Serial number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 182Service concerns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Servicing your vehicle

precautions when servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196servicing when you tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Shift-lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Shift positions (see Gearshift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Shoulder and lap belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . . 9Shoulder belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 12Side mirrors, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Sliding moon roof (see Moon roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Spare tire

changing the tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164finding the spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165removing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165temporary spare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Specification chart, lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Speed control

accelerating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88canceling a set speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88resuming a set speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89tap up/tap down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88turning off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89when towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Starting your vehicle

preparing to start your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

288

Starting your vehicle (continued)starting a cold engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50starting a warm engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47starting your vehicle if the battery is disabled . . . . . 159

Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Steering wheel

horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84locking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41speed controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Storage compartmentscenter console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Sunroof (moon roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Supplemental air bag readiness light . . . . . . . . . . . 59Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . 17

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Tail lamps, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Temperature control (see Climate control) . . . . . . . . . 69Tether anchor installation (see Child restraints). . . . . . . 37Tires

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164checking the pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227wear bands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

289

Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) . . . . . . . . . . 155Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

with a tow truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

calculating maximum trailer weight . . . . . . . . . . 155safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157trailer lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Transaxleautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137fluid, checking and adding (automatic) . . . . . . . . 230fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Transaxle control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Trunk, using the remote entry system to open . . . . . . . 93Tune-up specifications (VECI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Turn signal

indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

UUsed engine oil, disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

290

VVariable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information) decal . . . . 249Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . 177, 182Vehicle loading

automatic transaxles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154calculating the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154manual transaxles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Ventilating your vehicle (see Climate control) . . . . . . . 69Viscosity (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Visor (see Sun visor). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

WWarm engine, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Warning chimes

headlamps on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Warning lights (see Lights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Warranties

basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Warranty Information Booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Washer fluid

reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Wheel dollies (see Towing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Wheels

anti-theft lugnuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167inspection and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

291

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96power windows, operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Windshield washer fluid and wiperschecking and adding fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220checking and replacing wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 221operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Wrecker towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

File:cdixz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:07 1996

292

Service Station Information

[GS00200(ALL)05/95]

thirty pica

chart:0001251-G

File:cdgsz.exUpdate:Fri Feb 23 10:58:00 1996